File Opening

cloud.google.com/go

Package cloud is the root of the packages used to access Google Cloud Services. See https://pkg.go.dev/cloud.google.com/go for a full list of sub-modules. All clients in sub-packages are configurable via client options. These options are described here: https://pkg.go.dev/google.golang.org/api/option. Endpoint configuration is used to specify the URL to which requests are sent. It is used for services that support or require regional endpoints, as well as for other use cases such as testing against fake servers. For example, the Vertex AI service recommends that you configure the endpoint to the location with the features you want that is closest to your physical location or the location of your users. There is no global endpoint for Vertex AI. See Vertex AI - Locations for more details. The following example demonstrates configuring a Vertex AI client with a regional endpoint: All of the clients support authentication via Google Application Default Credentials, or by providing a JSON key file for a Service Account. See examples below. Google Application Default Credentials (ADC) is the recommended way to authorize and authenticate clients. For information on how to create and obtain Application Default Credentials, see https://cloud.google.com/docs/authentication/production. If you have your environment configured correctly you will not need to pass any extra information to the client libraries. Here is an example of a client using ADC to authenticate: You can use a file with credentials to authenticate and authorize, such as a JSON key file associated with a Google service account. Service Account keys can be created and downloaded from https://console.cloud.google.com/iam-admin/serviceaccounts. This example uses the Secret Manger client, but the same steps apply to the all other client libraries this package as well. Example: In some cases (for instance, you don't want to store secrets on disk), you can create credentials from in-memory JSON and use the WithCredentials option. This example uses the Secret Manager client, but the same steps apply to all other client libraries as well. Note that scopes can be found at https://developers.google.com/identity/protocols/oauth2/scopes, and are also provided in all auto-generated libraries: for example, cloud.google.com/go/secretmanager/apiv1 provides DefaultAuthScopes. Example: By default, non-streaming methods, like Create or Get, will have a default deadline applied to the context provided at call time, unless a context deadline is already set. Streaming methods have no default deadline and will run indefinitely. To set timeouts or arrange for cancellation, use context. Transient errors will be retried when correctness allows. Here is an example of setting a timeout for an RPC using context.WithTimeout: Here is an example of setting a timeout for an RPC using github.com/googleapis/gax-go/v2.WithTimeout: Here is an example of how to arrange for an RPC to be canceled, use context.WithCancel: Do not attempt to control the initial connection (dialing) of a service by setting a timeout on the context passed to NewClient. Dialing is non-blocking, so timeouts would be ineffective and would only interfere with credential refreshing, which uses the same context. Regardless of which transport is used, request headers can be set in the same way using [`callctx.SetHeaders`]setheaders. Here is a generic example: ## Google-reserved headers There are a some header keys that Google reserves for internal use that must not be ovewritten. The following header keys are broadly considered reserved and should not be conveyed by client library users unless instructed to do so: * `x-goog-api-client` * `x-goog-request-params` Be sure to check the individual package documentation for other service-specific reserved headers. For example, Storage supports a specific auditing header that is mentioned in that [module's documentation]storagedocs. ## Google Cloud system parameters Google Cloud services respect system parameterssystem parameters that can be used to augment request and/or response behavior. For the most part, they are not needed when using one of the enclosed client libraries. However, those that may be necessary are made available via the [`callctx`]callctx package. If not present there, consider opening an issue on that repo to request a new constant. Connection pooling differs in clients based on their transport. Cloud clients either rely on HTTP or gRPC transports to communicate with Google Cloud. Cloud clients that use HTTP rely on the underlying HTTP transport to cache connections for later re-use. These are cached to the http.MaxIdleConns and http.MaxIdleConnsPerHost settings in http.DefaultTransport by default. For gRPC clients, connection pooling is configurable. Users of Cloud Client Libraries may specify option.WithGRPCConnectionPool(n) as a client option to NewClient calls. This configures the underlying gRPC connections to be pooled and accessed in a round robin fashion. Minimal container images like Alpine lack CA certificates. This causes RPCs to appear to hang, because gRPC retries indefinitely. See https://github.com/googleapis/google-cloud-go/issues/928 for more information. For tips on how to write tests against code that calls into our libraries check out our Debugging Guide. For tips on how to write tests against code that calls into our libraries check out our Testing Guide. Most of the errors returned by the generated clients are wrapped in an github.com/googleapis/gax-go/v2/apierror.APIError and can be further unwrapped into a google.golang.org/grpc/status.Status or google.golang.org/api/googleapi.Error depending on the transport used to make the call (gRPC or REST). Converting your errors to these types can be a useful way to get more information about what went wrong while debugging. APIError gives access to specific details in the error. The transport-specific errors can still be unwrapped using the APIError. If the gRPC transport was used, the google.golang.org/grpc/status.Status can still be parsed using the google.golang.org/grpc/status.FromError function. Semver is used to communicate stability of the sub-modules of this package. Note, some stable sub-modules do contain packages, and sometimes features, that are considered unstable. If something is unstable it will be explicitly labeled as such. Example of package does in an unstable package: Clients that contain alpha and beta in their import path may change or go away without notice. Clients marked stable will maintain compatibility with future versions for as long as we can reasonably sustain. Incompatible changes might be made in some situations, including:

v0.116.0 • last month

github.com/jung-kurt/gofpdf

Package gofpdf implements a PDF document generator with high level support for text, drawing and images. - UTF-8 support - Choice of measurement unit, page format and margins - Page header and footer management - Automatic page breaks, line breaks, and text justification - Inclusion of JPEG, PNG, GIF, TIFF and basic path-only SVG images - Colors, gradients and alpha channel transparency - Outline bookmarks - Internal and external links - TrueType, Type1 and encoding support - Page compression - Lines, Bézier curves, arcs, and ellipses - Rotation, scaling, skewing, translation, and mirroring - Clipping - Document protection - Layers - Templates - Barcodes - Charting facility - Import PDFs as templates gofpdf has no dependencies other than the Go standard library. All tests pass on Linux, Mac and Windows platforms. gofpdf supports UTF-8 TrueType fonts and “right-to-left” languages. Note that Chinese, Japanese, and Korean characters may not be included in many general purpose fonts. For these languages, a specialized font (for example, NotoSansSC for simplified Chinese) can be used. Also, support is provided to automatically translate UTF-8 runes to code page encodings for languages that have fewer than 256 glyphs. This repository will not be maintained, at least for some unknown duration. But it is hoped that gofpdf has a bright future in the open source world. Due to Go’s promise of compatibility, gofpdf should continue to function without modification for a longer time than would be the case with many other languages. Forks should be based on the last viable commit. Tools such as active-forks can be used to select a fork that looks promising for your needs. If a particular fork looks like it has taken the lead in attracting followers, this README will be updated to point people in that direction. The efforts of all contributors to this project have been deeply appreciated. Best wishes to all of you. To install the package on your system, run Later, to receive updates, run The following Go code generates a simple PDF file. See the functions in the fpdf_test.go file (shown as examples in this documentation) for more advanced PDF examples. If an error occurs in an Fpdf method, an internal error field is set. After this occurs, Fpdf method calls typically return without performing any operations and the error state is retained. This error management scheme facilitates PDF generation since individual method calls do not need to be examined for failure; it is generally sufficient to wait until after Output() is called. For the same reason, if an error occurs in the calling application during PDF generation, it may be desirable for the application to transfer the error to the Fpdf instance by calling the SetError() method or the SetErrorf() method. At any time during the life cycle of the Fpdf instance, the error state can be determined with a call to Ok() or Err(). The error itself can be retrieved with a call to Error(). This package is a relatively straightforward translation from the original FPDF library written in PHP (despite the caveat in the introduction to Effective Go). The API names have been retained even though the Go idiom would suggest otherwise (for example, pdf.GetX() is used rather than simply pdf.X()). The similarity of the two libraries makes the original FPDF website a good source of information. It includes a forum and FAQ. However, some internal changes have been made. Page content is built up using buffers (of type bytes.Buffer) rather than repeated string concatenation. Errors are handled as explained above rather than panicking. Output is generated through an interface of type io.Writer or io.WriteCloser. A number of the original PHP methods behave differently based on the type of the arguments that are passed to them; in these cases additional methods have been exported to provide similar functionality. Font definition files are produced in JSON rather than PHP. A side effect of running go test ./... is the production of a number of example PDFs. These can be found in the gofpdf/pdf directory after the tests complete. Please note that these examples run in the context of a test. In order run an example as a standalone application, you’ll need to examine fpdf_test.go for some helper routines, for example exampleFilename() and summary(). Example PDFs can be compared with reference copies in order to verify that they have been generated as expected. This comparison will be performed if a PDF with the same name as the example PDF is placed in the gofpdf/pdf/reference directory and if the third argument to ComparePDFFiles() in internal/example/example.go is true. (By default it is false.) The routine that summarizes an example will look for this file and, if found, will call ComparePDFFiles() to check the example PDF for equality with its reference PDF. If differences exist between the two files they will be printed to standard output and the test will fail. If the reference file is missing, the comparison is considered to succeed. In order to successfully compare two PDFs, the placement of internal resources must be consistent and the internal creation timestamps must be the same. To do this, the methods SetCatalogSort() and SetCreationDate() need to be called for both files. This is done automatically for all examples. Nothing special is required to use the standard PDF fonts (courier, helvetica, times, zapfdingbats) in your documents other than calling SetFont(). You should use AddUTF8Font() or AddUTF8FontFromBytes() to add a TrueType UTF-8 encoded font. Use RTL() and LTR() methods switch between “right-to-left” and “left-to-right” mode. In order to use a different non-UTF-8 TrueType or Type1 font, you will need to generate a font definition file and, if the font will be embedded into PDFs, a compressed version of the font file. This is done by calling the MakeFont function or using the included makefont command line utility. To create the utility, cd into the makefont subdirectory and run “go build”. This will produce a standalone executable named makefont. Select the appropriate encoding file from the font subdirectory and run the command as in the following example. In your PDF generation code, call AddFont() to load the font and, as with the standard fonts, SetFont() to begin using it. Most examples, including the package example, demonstrate this method. Good sources of free, open-source fonts include Google Fonts and DejaVu Fonts. The draw2d package is a two dimensional vector graphics library that can generate output in different forms. It uses gofpdf for its document production mode. gofpdf is a global community effort and you are invited to make it even better. If you have implemented a new feature or corrected a problem, please consider contributing your change to the project. A contribution that does not directly pertain to the core functionality of gofpdf should be placed in its own directory directly beneath the contrib directory. Here are guidelines for making submissions. Your change should - be compatible with the MIT License - be properly documented - be formatted with go fmt - include an example in fpdf_test.go if appropriate - conform to the standards of golint and go vet, that is, golint . and go vet . should not generate any warnings - not diminish test coverage Pull requests are the preferred means of accepting your changes. gofpdf is released under the MIT License. It is copyrighted by Kurt Jung and the contributors acknowledged below. This package’s code and documentation are closely derived from the FPDF library created by Olivier Plathey, and a number of font and image resources are copied directly from it. Bruno Michel has provided valuable assistance with the code. Drawing support is adapted from the FPDF geometric figures script by David Hernández Sanz. Transparency support is adapted from the FPDF transparency script by Martin Hall-May. Support for gradients and clipping is adapted from FPDF scripts by Andreas Würmser. Support for outline bookmarks is adapted from Olivier Plathey by Manuel Cornes. Layer support is adapted from Olivier Plathey. Support for transformations is adapted from the FPDF transformation script by Moritz Wagner and Andreas Würmser. PDF protection is adapted from the work of Klemen Vodopivec for the FPDF product. Lawrence Kesteloot provided code to allow an image’s extent to be determined prior to placement. Support for vertical alignment within a cell was provided by Stefan Schroeder. Ivan Daniluk generalized the font and image loading code to use the Reader interface while maintaining backward compatibility. Anthony Starks provided code for the Polygon function. Robert Lillack provided the Beziergon function and corrected some naming issues with the internal curve function. Claudio Felber provided implementations for dashed line drawing and generalized font loading. Stani Michiels provided support for multi-segment path drawing with smooth line joins, line join styles, enhanced fill modes, and has helped greatly with package presentation and tests. Templating is adapted by Marcus Downing from the FPDF_Tpl library created by Jan Slabon and Setasign. Jelmer Snoeck contributed packages that generate a variety of barcodes and help with registering images on the web. Jelmer Snoek and Guillermo Pascual augmented the basic HTML functionality with aligned text. Kent Quirk implemented backwards-compatible support for reading DPI from images that support it, and for setting DPI manually and then having it properly taken into account when calculating image size. Paulo Coutinho provided support for static embedded fonts. Dan Meyers added support for embedded JavaScript. David Fish added a generic alias-replacement function to enable, among other things, table of contents functionality. Andy Bakun identified and corrected a problem in which the internal catalogs were not sorted stably. Paul Montag added encoding and decoding functionality for templates, including images that are embedded in templates; this allows templates to be stored independently of gofpdf. Paul also added support for page boxes used in printing PDF documents. Wojciech Matusiak added supported for word spacing. Artem Korotkiy added support of UTF-8 fonts. Dave Barnes added support for imported objects and templates. Brigham Thompson added support for rounded rectangles. Joe Westcott added underline functionality and optimized image storage. Benoit KUGLER contributed support for rectangles with corners of unequal radius, modification times, and for file attachments and annotations. - Remove all legacy code page font support; use UTF-8 exclusively - Improve test coverage as reported by the coverage tool. Example demonstrates the generation of a simple PDF document. Note that since only core fonts are used (in this case Arial, a synonym for Helvetica), an empty string can be specified for the font directory in the call to New(). Note also that the example.Filename() and example.Summary() functions belong to a separate, internal package and are not part of the gofpdf library. If an error occurs at some point during the construction of the document, subsequent method calls exit immediately and the error is finally retrieved with the output call where it can be handled by the application.

v1.16.2 • 5 years ago

bazil.org/fuse

Package fuse enables writing FUSE file systems on Linux and FreeBSD. There are two approaches to writing a FUSE file system. The first is to speak the low-level message protocol, reading from a Conn using ReadRequest and writing using the various Respond methods. This approach is closest to the actual interaction with the kernel and can be the simplest one in contexts such as protocol translators. Servers of synthesized file systems tend to share common bookkeeping abstracted away by the second approach, which is to call fs.Serve to serve the FUSE protocol using an implementation of the service methods in the interfaces FS* (file system), Node* (file or directory), and Handle* (opened file or directory). There are a daunting number of such methods that can be written, but few are required. The specific methods are described in the documentation for those interfaces. The examples/hellofs subdirectory contains a simple illustration of the fs.Serve approach. The required and optional methods for the FS, Node, and Handle interfaces have the general form where Op is the name of a FUSE operation. Op reads request parameters from req and writes results to resp. An operation whose only result is the error result omits the resp parameter. Multiple goroutines may call service methods simultaneously; the methods being called are responsible for appropriate synchronization. The operation must not hold on to the request or response, including any []byte fields such as WriteRequest.Data or SetxattrRequest.Xattr. Operations can return errors. The FUSE interface can only communicate POSIX errno error numbers to file system clients, the message is not visible to file system clients. The returned error can implement ErrorNumber to control the errno returned. Without ErrorNumber, a generic errno (EIO) is returned. Error messages will be visible in the debug log as part of the response. In some file systems, some operations may take an undetermined amount of time. For example, a Read waiting for a network message or a matching Write might wait indefinitely. If the request is cancelled and no longer needed, the context will be cancelled. Blocking operations should select on a receive from ctx.Done() and attempt to abort the operation early if the receive succeeds (meaning the channel is closed). To indicate that the operation failed because it was aborted, return syscall.EINTR. If an operation does not block for an indefinite amount of time, supporting cancellation is not necessary. All requests types embed a Header, meaning that the method can inspect req.Pid, req.Uid, and req.Gid as necessary to implement permission checking. The kernel FUSE layer normally prevents other users from accessing the FUSE file system (to change this, see AllowOther), but does not enforce access modes (to change this, see DefaultPermissions). Behavior and metadata of the mounted file system can be changed by passing MountOption values to Mount.

v0.0.0-20230120002735-62a210ff1fd5 • 2 years ago

github.com/cznic/ql

Package ql implements a pure Go embedded SQL database engine. QL is a member of the SQL family of languages. It is less complex and less powerful than SQL (whichever specification SQL is considered to be). 2018-08-02: Release v1.2.0 adds initial support for Go modules. 2017-01-10: Release v1.1.0 fixes some bugs and adds a configurable WAL headroom. 2016-07-29: Release v1.0.6 enables alternatively using = instead of == for equality operation. 2016-07-11: Release v1.0.5 undoes vendoring of lldb. QL now uses stable lldb (github.com/cznic/lldb). 2016-07-06: Release v1.0.4 fixes a panic when closing the WAL file. 2016-04-03: Release v1.0.3 fixes a data race. 2016-03-23: Release v1.0.2 vendors github.com/cznic/exp/lldb and github.com/camlistore/go4/lock. 2016-03-17: Release v1.0.1 adjusts for latest goyacc. Parser error messages are improved and changed, but their exact form is not considered a API change. 2016-03-05: The current version has been tagged v1.0.0. 2015-06-15: To improve compatibility with other SQL implementations, the count built-in aggregate function now accepts * as its argument. 2015-05-29: The execution planner was rewritten from scratch. It should use indices in all places where they were used before plus in some additional situations. It is possible to investigate the plan using the newly added EXPLAIN statement. The QL tool is handy for such analysis. If the planner would have used an index, but no such exists, the plan includes hints in form of copy/paste ready CREATE INDEX statements. The planner is still quite simple and a lot of work on it is yet ahead. You can help this process by filling an issue with a schema and query which fails to use an index or indices when it should, in your opinion. Bonus points for including output of `ql 'explain <query>'`. 2015-05-09: The grammar of the CREATE INDEX statement now accepts an expression list instead of a single expression, which was further limited to just a column name or the built-in id(). As a side effect, composite indices are now functional. However, the values in the expression-list style index are not yet used by other statements or the statement/query planner. The composite index is useful while having UNIQUE clause to check for semantically duplicate rows before they get added to the table or when such a row is mutated using the UPDATE statement and the expression-list style index tuple of the row is thus recomputed. 2015-05-02: The Schema field of table __Table now correctly reflects any column constraints and/or defaults. Also, the (*DB).Info method now has that information provided in new ColumInfo fields NotNull, Constraint and Default. 2015-04-20: Added support for {LEFT,RIGHT,FULL} [OUTER] JOIN. 2015-04-18: Column definitions can now have constraints and defaults. Details are discussed in the "Constraints and defaults" chapter below the CREATE TABLE statement documentation. 2015-03-06: New built-in functions formatFloat and formatInt. Thanks urandom! (https://github.com/urandom) 2015-02-16: IN predicate now accepts a SELECT statement. See the updated "Predicates" section. 2015-01-17: Logical operators || and && have now alternative spellings: OR and AND (case insensitive). AND was a keyword before, but OR is a new one. This can possibly break existing queries. For the record, it's a good idea to not use any name appearing in, for example, [7] in your queries as the list of QL's keywords may expand for gaining better compatibility with existing SQL "standards". 2015-01-12: ACID guarantees were tightened at the cost of performance in some cases. The write collecting window mechanism, a formerly used implementation detail, was removed. Inserting rows one by one in a transaction is now slow. I mean very slow. Try to avoid inserting single rows in a transaction. Instead, whenever possible, perform batch updates of tens to, say thousands of rows in a single transaction. See also: http://www.sqlite.org/faq.html#q19, the discussed synchronization principles involved are the same as for QL, modulo minor details. Note: A side effect is that closing a DB before exiting an application, both for the Go API and through database/sql driver, is no more required, strictly speaking. Beware that exiting an application while there is an open (uncommitted) transaction in progress means losing the transaction data. However, the DB will not become corrupted because of not closing it. Nor that was the case before, but formerly failing to close a DB could have resulted in losing the data of the last transaction. 2014-09-21: id() now optionally accepts a single argument - a table name. 2014-09-01: Added the DB.Flush() method and the LIKE pattern matching predicate. 2014-08-08: The built in functions max and min now accept also time values. Thanks opennota! (https://github.com/opennota) 2014-06-05: RecordSet interface extended by new methods FirstRow and Rows. 2014-06-02: Indices on id() are now used by SELECT statements. 2014-05-07: Introduction of Marshal, Schema, Unmarshal. 2014-04-15: Added optional IF NOT EXISTS clause to CREATE INDEX and optional IF EXISTS clause to DROP INDEX. 2014-04-12: The column Unique in the virtual table __Index was renamed to IsUnique because the old name is a keyword. Unfortunately, this is a breaking change, sorry. 2014-04-11: Introduction of LIMIT, OFFSET. 2014-04-10: Introduction of query rewriting. 2014-04-07: Introduction of indices. QL imports zappy[8], a block-based compressor, which speeds up its performance by using a C version of the compression/decompression algorithms. If a CGO-free (pure Go) version of QL, or an app using QL, is required, please include 'purego' in the -tags option of go {build,get,install}. For example: If zappy was installed before installing QL, it might be necessary to rebuild zappy first (or rebuild QL with all its dependencies using the -a option): The syntax is specified using Extended Backus-Naur Form (EBNF) Lower-case production names are used to identify lexical tokens. Non-terminals are in CamelCase. Lexical tokens are enclosed in double quotes "" or back quotes “. The form a … b represents the set of characters from a through b as alternatives. The horizontal ellipsis … is also used elsewhere in the spec to informally denote various enumerations or code snippets that are not further specified. QL source code is Unicode text encoded in UTF-8. The text is not canonicalized, so a single accented code point is distinct from the same character constructed from combining an accent and a letter; those are treated as two code points. For simplicity, this document will use the unqualified term character to refer to a Unicode code point in the source text. Each code point is distinct; for instance, upper and lower case letters are different characters. Implementation restriction: For compatibility with other tools, the parser may disallow the NUL character (U+0000) in the statement. Implementation restriction: A byte order mark is disallowed anywhere in QL statements. The following terms are used to denote specific character classes The underscore character _ (U+005F) is considered a letter. Lexical elements are comments, tokens, identifiers, keywords, operators and delimiters, integer, floating-point, imaginary, rune and string literals and QL parameters. Line comments start with the character sequence // or -- and stop at the end of the line. A line comment acts like a space. General comments start with the character sequence /* and continue through the character sequence */. A general comment acts like a space. Comments do not nest. Tokens form the vocabulary of QL. There are four classes: identifiers, keywords, operators and delimiters, and literals. White space, formed from spaces (U+0020), horizontal tabs (U+0009), carriage returns (U+000D), and newlines (U+000A), is ignored except as it separates tokens that would otherwise combine into a single token. The formal grammar uses semicolons ";" as separators of QL statements. A single QL statement or the last QL statement in a list of statements can have an optional semicolon terminator. (Actually a separator from the following empty statement.) Identifiers name entities such as tables or record set columns. An identifier is a sequence of one or more letters and digits. The first character in an identifier must be a letter. For example No identifiers are predeclared, however note that no keyword can be used as an identifier. Identifiers starting with two underscores are used for meta data virtual tables names. For forward compatibility, users should generally avoid using any identifiers starting with two underscores. For example The following keywords are reserved and may not be used as identifiers. Keywords are not case sensitive. The following character sequences represent operators, delimiters, and other special tokens Operators consisting of more than one character are referred to by names in the rest of the documentation An integer literal is a sequence of digits representing an integer constant. An optional prefix sets a non-decimal base: 0 for octal, 0x or 0X for hexadecimal. In hexadecimal literals, letters a-f and A-F represent values 10 through 15. For example A floating-point literal is a decimal representation of a floating-point constant. It has an integer part, a decimal point, a fractional part, and an exponent part. The integer and fractional part comprise decimal digits; the exponent part is an e or E followed by an optionally signed decimal exponent. One of the integer part or the fractional part may be elided; one of the decimal point or the exponent may be elided. For example An imaginary literal is a decimal representation of the imaginary part of a complex constant. It consists of a floating-point literal or decimal integer followed by the lower-case letter i. For example A rune literal represents a rune constant, an integer value identifying a Unicode code point. A rune literal is expressed as one or more characters enclosed in single quotes. Within the quotes, any character may appear except single quote and newline. A single quoted character represents the Unicode value of the character itself, while multi-character sequences beginning with a backslash encode values in various formats. The simplest form represents the single character within the quotes; since QL statements are Unicode characters encoded in UTF-8, multiple UTF-8-encoded bytes may represent a single integer value. For instance, the literal 'a' holds a single byte representing a literal a, Unicode U+0061, value 0x61, while 'ä' holds two bytes (0xc3 0xa4) representing a literal a-dieresis, U+00E4, value 0xe4. Several backslash escapes allow arbitrary values to be encoded as ASCII text. There are four ways to represent the integer value as a numeric constant: \x followed by exactly two hexadecimal digits; \u followed by exactly four hexadecimal digits; \U followed by exactly eight hexadecimal digits, and a plain backslash \ followed by exactly three octal digits. In each case the value of the literal is the value represented by the digits in the corresponding base. Although these representations all result in an integer, they have different valid ranges. Octal escapes must represent a value between 0 and 255 inclusive. Hexadecimal escapes satisfy this condition by construction. The escapes \u and \U represent Unicode code points so within them some values are illegal, in particular those above 0x10FFFF and surrogate halves. After a backslash, certain single-character escapes represent special values All other sequences starting with a backslash are illegal inside rune literals. For example A string literal represents a string constant obtained from concatenating a sequence of characters. There are two forms: raw string literals and interpreted string literals. Raw string literals are character sequences between back quotes “. Within the quotes, any character is legal except back quote. The value of a raw string literal is the string composed of the uninterpreted (implicitly UTF-8-encoded) characters between the quotes; in particular, backslashes have no special meaning and the string may contain newlines. Carriage returns inside raw string literals are discarded from the raw string value. Interpreted string literals are character sequences between double quotes "". The text between the quotes, which may not contain newlines, forms the value of the literal, with backslash escapes interpreted as they are in rune literals (except that \' is illegal and \" is legal), with the same restrictions. The three-digit octal (\nnn) and two-digit hexadecimal (\xnn) escapes represent individual bytes of the resulting string; all other escapes represent the (possibly multi-byte) UTF-8 encoding of individual characters. Thus inside a string literal \377 and \xFF represent a single byte of value 0xFF=255, while ÿ, \u00FF, \U000000FF and \xc3\xbf represent the two bytes 0xc3 0xbf of the UTF-8 encoding of character U+00FF. For example These examples all represent the same string If the statement source represents a character as two code points, such as a combining form involving an accent and a letter, the result will be an error if placed in a rune literal (it is not a single code point), and will appear as two code points if placed in a string literal. Literals are assigned their values from the respective text representation at "compile" (parse) time. QL parameters provide the same functionality as literals, but their value is assigned at execution time from an expression list passed to DB.Run or DB.Execute. Using '?' or '$' is completely equivalent. For example Keywords 'false' and 'true' (not case sensitive) represent the two possible constant values of type bool (also not case sensitive). Keyword 'NULL' (not case sensitive) represents an untyped constant which is assignable to any type. NULL is distinct from any other value of any type. A type determines the set of values and operations specific to values of that type. A type is specified by a type name. Named instances of the boolean, numeric, and string types are keywords. The names are not case sensitive. Note: The blob type is exchanged between the back end and the API as []byte. On 32 bit platforms this limits the size which the implementation can handle to 2G. A boolean type represents the set of Boolean truth values denoted by the predeclared constants true and false. The predeclared boolean type is bool. A duration type represents the elapsed time between two instants as an int64 nanosecond count. The representation limits the largest representable duration to approximately 290 years. A numeric type represents sets of integer or floating-point values. The predeclared architecture-independent numeric types are The value of an n-bit integer is n bits wide and represented using two's complement arithmetic. Conversions are required when different numeric types are mixed in an expression or assignment. A string type represents the set of string values. A string value is a (possibly empty) sequence of bytes. The case insensitive keyword for the string type is 'string'. The length of a string (its size in bytes) can be discovered using the built-in function len. A time type represents an instant in time with nanosecond precision. Each time has associated with it a location, consulted when computing the presentation form of the time. The following functions are implicitly declared An expression specifies the computation of a value by applying operators and functions to operands. Operands denote the elementary values in an expression. An operand may be a literal, a (possibly qualified) identifier denoting a constant or a function or a table/record set column, or a parenthesized expression. A qualified identifier is an identifier qualified with a table/record set name prefix. For example Primary expression are the operands for unary and binary expressions. For example A primary expression of the form denotes the element of a string indexed by x. Its type is byte. The value x is called the index. The following rules apply - The index x must be of integer type except bigint or duration; it is in range if 0 <= x < len(s), otherwise it is out of range. - A constant index must be non-negative and representable by a value of type int. - A constant index must be in range if the string a is a literal. - If x is out of range at run time, a run-time error occurs. - s[x] is the byte at index x and the type of s[x] is byte. If s is NULL or x is NULL then the result is NULL. Otherwise s[x] is illegal. For a string, the primary expression constructs a substring. The indices low and high select which elements appear in the result. The result has indices starting at 0 and length equal to high - low. For convenience, any of the indices may be omitted. A missing low index defaults to zero; a missing high index defaults to the length of the sliced operand The indices low and high are in range if 0 <= low <= high <= len(a), otherwise they are out of range. A constant index must be non-negative and representable by a value of type int. If both indices are constant, they must satisfy low <= high. If the indices are out of range at run time, a run-time error occurs. Integer values of type bigint or duration cannot be used as indices. If s is NULL the result is NULL. If low or high is not omitted and is NULL then the result is NULL. Given an identifier f denoting a predeclared function, calls f with arguments a1, a2, … an. Arguments are evaluated before the function is called. The type of the expression is the result type of f. In a function call, the function value and arguments are evaluated in the usual order. After they are evaluated, the parameters of the call are passed by value to the function and the called function begins execution. The return value of the function is passed by value when the function returns. Calling an undefined function causes a compile-time error. Operators combine operands into expressions. Comparisons are discussed elsewhere. For other binary operators, the operand types must be identical unless the operation involves shifts or untyped constants. For operations involving constants only, see the section on constant expressions. Except for shift operations, if one operand is an untyped constant and the other operand is not, the constant is converted to the type of the other operand. The right operand in a shift expression must have unsigned integer type or be an untyped constant that can be converted to unsigned integer type. If the left operand of a non-constant shift expression is an untyped constant, the type of the constant is what it would be if the shift expression were replaced by its left operand alone. Expressions of the form yield a boolean value true if expr2, a regular expression, matches expr1 (see also [6]). Both expression must be of type string. If any one of the expressions is NULL the result is NULL. Predicates are special form expressions having a boolean result type. Expressions of the form are equivalent, including NULL handling, to The types of involved expressions must be comparable as defined in "Comparison operators". Another form of the IN predicate creates the expression list from a result of a SelectStmt. The SelectStmt must select only one column. The produced expression list is resource limited by the memory available to the process. NULL values produced by the SelectStmt are ignored, but if all records of the SelectStmt are NULL the predicate yields NULL. The select statement is evaluated only once. If the type of expr is not the same as the type of the field returned by the SelectStmt then the set operation yields false. The type of the column returned by the SelectStmt must be one of the simple (non blob-like) types: Expressions of the form are equivalent, including NULL handling, to The types of involved expressions must be ordered as defined in "Comparison operators". Expressions of the form yield a boolean value true if expr does not have a specific type (case A) or if expr has a specific type (case B). In other cases the result is a boolean value false. Unary operators have the highest precedence. There are five precedence levels for binary operators. Multiplication operators bind strongest, followed by addition operators, comparison operators, && (logical AND), and finally || (logical OR) Binary operators of the same precedence associate from left to right. For instance, x / y * z is the same as (x / y) * z. Note that the operator precedence is reflected explicitly by the grammar. Arithmetic operators apply to numeric values and yield a result of the same type as the first operand. The four standard arithmetic operators (+, -, *, /) apply to integer, rational, floating-point, and complex types; + also applies to strings; +,- also applies to times. All other arithmetic operators apply to integers only. sum integers, rationals, floats, complex values, strings difference integers, rationals, floats, complex values, times product integers, rationals, floats, complex values / quotient integers, rationals, floats, complex values % remainder integers & bitwise AND integers | bitwise OR integers ^ bitwise XOR integers &^ bit clear (AND NOT) integers << left shift integer << unsigned integer >> right shift integer >> unsigned integer Strings can be concatenated using the + operator String addition creates a new string by concatenating the operands. A value of type duration can be added to or subtracted from a value of type time. Times can subtracted from each other producing a value of type duration. For two integer values x and y, the integer quotient q = x / y and remainder r = x % y satisfy the following relationships with x / y truncated towards zero ("truncated division"). As an exception to this rule, if the dividend x is the most negative value for the int type of x, the quotient q = x / -1 is equal to x (and r = 0). If the divisor is a constant expression, it must not be zero. If the divisor is zero at run time, a run-time error occurs. If the dividend is non-negative and the divisor is a constant power of 2, the division may be replaced by a right shift, and computing the remainder may be replaced by a bitwise AND operation The shift operators shift the left operand by the shift count specified by the right operand. They implement arithmetic shifts if the left operand is a signed integer and logical shifts if it is an unsigned integer. There is no upper limit on the shift count. Shifts behave as if the left operand is shifted n times by 1 for a shift count of n. As a result, x << 1 is the same as x*2 and x >> 1 is the same as x/2 but truncated towards negative infinity. For integer operands, the unary operators +, -, and ^ are defined as follows For floating-point and complex numbers, +x is the same as x, while -x is the negation of x. The result of a floating-point or complex division by zero is not specified beyond the IEEE-754 standard; whether a run-time error occurs is implementation-specific. Whenever any operand of any arithmetic operation, unary or binary, is NULL, as well as in the case of the string concatenating operation, the result is NULL. For unsigned integer values, the operations +, -, *, and << are computed modulo 2n, where n is the bit width of the unsigned integer's type. Loosely speaking, these unsigned integer operations discard high bits upon overflow, and expressions may rely on “wrap around”. For signed integers with a finite bit width, the operations +, -, *, and << may legally overflow and the resulting value exists and is deterministically defined by the signed integer representation, the operation, and its operands. No exception is raised as a result of overflow. An evaluator may not optimize an expression under the assumption that overflow does not occur. For instance, it may not assume that x < x + 1 is always true. Integers of type bigint and rationals do not overflow but their handling is limited by the memory resources available to the program. Comparison operators compare two operands and yield a boolean value. In any comparison, the first operand must be of same type as is the second operand, or vice versa. The equality operators == and != apply to operands that are comparable. The ordering operators <, <=, >, and >= apply to operands that are ordered. These terms and the result of the comparisons are defined as follows - Boolean values are comparable. Two boolean values are equal if they are either both true or both false. - Complex values are comparable. Two complex values u and v are equal if both real(u) == real(v) and imag(u) == imag(v). - Integer values are comparable and ordered, in the usual way. Note that durations are integers. - Floating point values are comparable and ordered, as defined by the IEEE-754 standard. - Rational values are comparable and ordered, in the usual way. - String and Blob values are comparable and ordered, lexically byte-wise. - Time values are comparable and ordered. Whenever any operand of any comparison operation is NULL, the result is NULL. Note that slices are always of type string. Logical operators apply to boolean values and yield a boolean result. The right operand is evaluated conditionally. The truth tables for logical operations with NULL values Conversions are expressions of the form T(x) where T is a type and x is an expression that can be converted to type T. A constant value x can be converted to type T in any of these cases: - x is representable by a value of type T. - x is a floating-point constant, T is a floating-point type, and x is representable by a value of type T after rounding using IEEE 754 round-to-even rules. The constant T(x) is the rounded value. - x is an integer constant and T is a string type. The same rule as for non-constant x applies in this case. Converting a constant yields a typed constant as result. A non-constant value x can be converted to type T in any of these cases: - x has type T. - x's type and T are both integer or floating point types. - x's type and T are both complex types. - x is an integer, except bigint or duration, and T is a string type. Specific rules apply to (non-constant) conversions between numeric types or to and from a string type. These conversions may change the representation of x and incur a run-time cost. All other conversions only change the type but not the representation of x. A conversion of NULL to any type yields NULL. For the conversion of non-constant numeric values, the following rules apply 1. When converting between integer types, if the value is a signed integer, it is sign extended to implicit infinite precision; otherwise it is zero extended. It is then truncated to fit in the result type's size. For example, if v == uint16(0x10F0), then uint32(int8(v)) == 0xFFFFFFF0. The conversion always yields a valid value; there is no indication of overflow. 2. When converting a floating-point number to an integer, the fraction is discarded (truncation towards zero). 3. When converting an integer or floating-point number to a floating-point type, or a complex number to another complex type, the result value is rounded to the precision specified by the destination type. For instance, the value of a variable x of type float32 may be stored using additional precision beyond that of an IEEE-754 32-bit number, but float32(x) represents the result of rounding x's value to 32-bit precision. Similarly, x + 0.1 may use more than 32 bits of precision, but float32(x + 0.1) does not. In all non-constant conversions involving floating-point or complex values, if the result type cannot represent the value the conversion succeeds but the result value is implementation-dependent. 1. Converting a signed or unsigned integer value to a string type yields a string containing the UTF-8 representation of the integer. Values outside the range of valid Unicode code points are converted to "\uFFFD". 2. Converting a blob to a string type yields a string whose successive bytes are the elements of the blob. 3. Converting a value of a string type to a blob yields a blob whose successive elements are the bytes of the string. 4. Converting a value of a bigint type to a string yields a string containing the decimal decimal representation of the integer. 5. Converting a value of a string type to a bigint yields a bigint value containing the integer represented by the string value. A prefix of “0x” or “0X” selects base 16; the “0” prefix selects base 8, and a “0b” or “0B” prefix selects base 2. Otherwise the value is interpreted in base 10. An error occurs if the string value is not in any valid format. 6. Converting a value of a rational type to a string yields a string containing the decimal decimal representation of the rational in the form "a/b" (even if b == 1). 7. Converting a value of a string type to a bigrat yields a bigrat value containing the rational represented by the string value. The string can be given as a fraction "a/b" or as a floating-point number optionally followed by an exponent. An error occurs if the string value is not in any valid format. 8. Converting a value of a duration type to a string returns a string representing the duration in the form "72h3m0.5s". Leading zero units are omitted. As a special case, durations less than one second format using a smaller unit (milli-, micro-, or nanoseconds) to ensure that the leading digit is non-zero. The zero duration formats as 0, with no unit. 9. Converting a string value to a duration yields a duration represented by the string. A duration string is a possibly signed sequence of decimal numbers, each with optional fraction and a unit suffix, such as "300ms", "-1.5h" or "2h45m". Valid time units are "ns", "us" (or "µs"), "ms", "s", "m", "h". 10. Converting a time value to a string returns the time formatted using the format string When evaluating the operands of an expression or of function calls, operations are evaluated in lexical left-to-right order. For example, in the evaluation of the function calls and evaluation of c happen in the order h(), i(), j(), c. Floating-point operations within a single expression are evaluated according to the associativity of the operators. Explicit parentheses affect the evaluation by overriding the default associativity. In the expression x + (y + z) the addition y + z is performed before adding x. Statements control execution. The empty statement does nothing. Alter table statements modify existing tables. With the ADD clause it adds a new column to the table. The column must not exist. With the DROP clause it removes an existing column from a table. The column must exist and it must be not the only (last) column of the table. IOW, there cannot be a table with no columns. For example When adding a column to a table with existing data, the constraint clause of the ColumnDef cannot be used. Adding a constrained column to an empty table is fine. Begin transactions statements introduce a new transaction level. Every transaction level must be eventually balanced by exactly one of COMMIT or ROLLBACK statements. Note that when a transaction is roll-backed because of a statement failure then no explicit balancing of the respective BEGIN TRANSACTION is statement is required nor permitted. Failure to properly balance any opened transaction level may cause dead locks and/or lose of data updated in the uppermost opened but never properly closed transaction level. For example A database cannot be updated (mutated) outside of a transaction. Statements requiring a transaction A database is effectively read only outside of a transaction. Statements not requiring a transaction The commit statement closes the innermost transaction nesting level. If that's the outermost level then the updates to the DB made by the transaction are atomically made persistent. For example Create index statements create new indices. Index is a named projection of ordered values of a table column to the respective records. As a special case the id() of the record can be indexed. Index name must not be the same as any of the existing tables and it also cannot be the same as of any column name of the table the index is on. For example Now certain SELECT statements may use the indices to speed up joins and/or to speed up record set filtering when the WHERE clause is used; or the indices might be used to improve the performance when the ORDER BY clause is present. The UNIQUE modifier requires the indexed values tuple to be index-wise unique or have all values NULL. The optional IF NOT EXISTS clause makes the statement a no operation if the index already exists. A simple index consists of only one expression which must be either a column name or the built-in id(). A more complex and more general index is one that consists of more than one expression or its single expression does not qualify as a simple index. In this case the type of all expressions in the list must be one of the non blob-like types. Note: Blob-like types are blob, bigint, bigrat, time and duration. Create table statements create new tables. A column definition declares the column name and type. Table names and column names are case sensitive. Neither a table or an index of the same name may exist in the DB. For example The optional IF NOT EXISTS clause makes the statement a no operation if the table already exists. The optional constraint clause has two forms. The first one is found in many SQL dialects. This form prevents the data in column DepartmentName to be NULL. The second form allows an arbitrary boolean expression to be used to validate the column. If the value of the expression is true then the validation succeeded. If the value of the expression is false or NULL then the validation fails. If the value of the expression is not of type bool an error occurs. The optional DEFAULT clause is an expression which, if present, is substituted instead of a NULL value when the colum is assigned a value. Note that the constraint and/or default expressions may refer to other columns by name: When a table row is inserted by the INSERT INTO statement or when a table row is updated by the UPDATE statement, the order of operations is as follows: 1. The new values of the affected columns are set and the values of all the row columns become the named values which can be referred to in default expressions evaluated in step 2. 2. If any row column value is NULL and the DEFAULT clause is present in the column's definition, the default expression is evaluated and its value is set as the respective column value. 3. The values, potentially updated, of row columns become the named values which can be referred to in constraint expressions evaluated during step 4. 4. All row columns which definition has the constraint clause present will have that constraint checked. If any constraint violation is detected, the overall operation fails and no changes to the table are made. Delete from statements remove rows from a table, which must exist. For example If the WHERE clause is not present then all rows are removed and the statement is equivalent to the TRUNCATE TABLE statement. Drop index statements remove indices from the DB. The index must exist. For example The optional IF EXISTS clause makes the statement a no operation if the index does not exist. Drop table statements remove tables from the DB. The table must exist. For example The optional IF EXISTS clause makes the statement a no operation if the table does not exist. Insert into statements insert new rows into tables. New rows come from literal data, if using the VALUES clause, or are a result of select statement. In the later case the select statement is fully evaluated before the insertion of any rows is performed, allowing to insert values calculated from the same table rows are to be inserted into. If the ColumnNameList part is omitted then the number of values inserted in the row must be the same as are columns in the table. If the ColumnNameList part is present then the number of values per row must be same as the same number of column names. All other columns of the record are set to NULL. The type of the value assigned to a column must be the same as is the column's type or the value must be NULL. For example If any of the columns of the table were defined using the optional constraints clause or the optional defaults clause then those are processed on a per row basis. The details are discussed in the "Constraints and defaults" chapter below the CREATE TABLE statement documentation. Explain statement produces a recordset consisting of lines of text which describe the execution plan of a statement, if any. For example, the QL tool treats the explain statement specially and outputs the joined lines: The explanation may aid in uderstanding how a statement/query would be executed and if indices are used as expected - or which indices may possibly improve the statement performance. The create index statements above were directly copy/pasted in the terminal from the suggestions provided by the filter recordset pipeline part returned by the explain statement. If the statement has nothing special in its plan, the result is the original statement. To get an explanation of the select statement of the IN predicate, use the EXPLAIN statement with that particular select statement. The rollback statement closes the innermost transaction nesting level discarding any updates to the DB made by it. If that's the outermost level then the effects on the DB are as if the transaction never happened. For example The (temporary) record set from the last statement is returned and can be processed by the client. In this case the rollback is the same as 'DROP TABLE tmp;' but it can be a more complex operation. Select from statements produce recordsets. The optional DISTINCT modifier ensures all rows in the result recordset are unique. Either all of the resulting fields are returned ('*') or only those named in FieldList. RecordSetList is a list of table names or parenthesized select statements, optionally (re)named using the AS clause. The result can be filtered using a WhereClause and orderd by the OrderBy clause. For example If Recordset is a nested, parenthesized SelectStmt then it must be given a name using the AS clause if its field are to be accessible in expressions. A field is an named expression. Identifiers, not used as a type in conversion or a function name in the Call clause, denote names of (other) fields, values of which should be used in the expression. The expression can be named using the AS clause. If the AS clause is not present and the expression consists solely of a field name, then that field name is used as the name of the resulting field. Otherwise the field is unnamed. For example The SELECT statement can optionally enumerate the desired/resulting fields in a list. No two identical field names can appear in the list. When more than one record set is used in the FROM clause record set list, the result record set field names are rewritten to be qualified using the record set names. If a particular record set doesn't have a name, its respective fields became unnamed. The optional JOIN clause, for example is mostly equal to except that the rows from a which, when they appear in the cross join, never made expr to evaluate to true, are combined with a virtual row from b, containing all nulls, and added to the result set. For the RIGHT JOIN variant the discussed rules are used for rows from b not satisfying expr == true and the virtual, all-null row "comes" from a. The FULL JOIN adds the respective rows which would be otherwise provided by the separate executions of the LEFT JOIN and RIGHT JOIN variants. For more thorough OUTER JOIN discussion please see the Wikipedia article at [10]. Resultins rows of a SELECT statement can be optionally ordered by the ORDER BY clause. Collating proceeds by considering the expressions in the expression list left to right until a collating order is determined. Any possibly remaining expressions are not evaluated. All of the expression values must yield an ordered type or NULL. Ordered types are defined in "Comparison operators". Collating of elements having a NULL value is different compared to what the comparison operators yield in expression evaluation (NULL result instead of a boolean value). Below, T denotes a non NULL value of any QL type. NULL collates before any non NULL value (is considered smaller than T). Two NULLs have no collating order (are considered equal). The WHERE clause restricts records considered by some statements, like SELECT FROM, DELETE FROM, or UPDATE. It is an error if the expression evaluates to a non null value of non bool type. Another form of the WHERE clause is an existence predicate of a parenthesized select statement. The EXISTS form evaluates to true if the parenthesized SELECT statement produces a non empty record set. The NOT EXISTS form evaluates to true if the parenthesized SELECT statement produces an empty record set. The parenthesized SELECT statement is evaluated only once (TODO issue #159). The GROUP BY clause is used to project rows having common values into a smaller set of rows. For example Using the GROUP BY without any aggregate functions in the selected fields is in certain cases equal to using the DISTINCT modifier. The last two examples above produce the same resultsets. The optional OFFSET clause allows to ignore first N records. For example The above will produce only rows 11, 12, ... of the record set, if they exist. The value of the expression must a non negative integer, but not bigint or duration. The optional LIMIT clause allows to ignore all but first N records. For example The above will return at most the first 10 records of the record set. The value of the expression must a non negative integer, but not bigint or duration. The LIMIT and OFFSET clauses can be combined. For example Considering table t has, say 10 records, the above will produce only records 4 - 8. After returning record #8, no more result rows/records are computed. 1. The FROM clause is evaluated, producing a Cartesian product of its source record sets (tables or nested SELECT statements). 2. If present, the JOIN cluase is evaluated on the result set of the previous evaluation and the recordset specified by the JOIN clause. (... JOIN Recordset ON ...) 3. If present, the WHERE clause is evaluated on the result set of the previous evaluation. 4. If present, the GROUP BY clause is evaluated on the result set of the previous evaluation(s). 5. The SELECT field expressions are evaluated on the result set of the previous evaluation(s). 6. If present, the DISTINCT modifier is evaluated on the result set of the previous evaluation(s). 7. If present, the ORDER BY clause is evaluated on the result set of the previous evaluation(s). 8. If present, the OFFSET clause is evaluated on the result set of the previous evaluation(s). The offset expression is evaluated once for the first record produced by the previous evaluations. 9. If present, the LIMIT clause is evaluated on the result set of the previous evaluation(s). The limit expression is evaluated once for the first record produced by the previous evaluations. Truncate table statements remove all records from a table. The table must exist. For example Update statements change values of fields in rows of a table. For example Note: The SET clause is optional. If any of the columns of the table were defined using the optional constraints clause or the optional defaults clause then those are processed on a per row basis. The details are discussed in the "Constraints and defaults" chapter below the CREATE TABLE statement documentation. To allow to query for DB meta data, there exist specially named tables, some of them being virtual. Note: Virtual system tables may have fake table-wise unique but meaningless and unstable record IDs. Do not apply the built-in id() to any system table. The table __Table lists all tables in the DB. The schema is The Schema column returns the statement to (re)create table Name. This table is virtual. The table __Colum lists all columns of all tables in the DB. The schema is The Ordinal column defines the 1-based index of the column in the record. This table is virtual. The table __Colum2 lists all columns of all tables in the DB which have the constraint NOT NULL or which have a constraint expression defined or which have a default expression defined. The schema is It's possible to obtain a consolidated recordset for all properties of all DB columns using The Name column is the column name in TableName. The table __Index lists all indices in the DB. The schema is The IsUnique columns reflects if the index was created using the optional UNIQUE clause. This table is virtual. Built-in functions are predeclared. The built-in aggregate function avg returns the average of values of an expression. Avg ignores NULL values, but returns NULL if all values of a column are NULL or if avg is applied to an empty record set. The column values must be of a numeric type. The built-in function contains returns true if substr is within s. If any argument to contains is NULL the result is NULL. The built-in aggregate function count returns how many times an expression has a non NULL values or the number of rows in a record set. Note: count() returns 0 for an empty record set. For example Date returns the time corresponding to in the appropriate zone for that time in the given location. The month, day, hour, min, sec, and nsec values may be outside their usual ranges and will be normalized during the conversion. For example, October 32 converts to November 1. A daylight savings time transition skips or repeats times. For example, in the United States, March 13, 2011 2:15am never occurred, while November 6, 2011 1:15am occurred twice. In such cases, the choice of time zone, and therefore the time, is not well-defined. Date returns a time that is correct in one of the two zones involved in the transition, but it does not guarantee which. A location maps time instants to the zone in use at that time. Typically, the location represents the collection of time offsets in use in a geographical area, such as "CEST" and "CET" for central Europe. "local" represents the system's local time zone. "UTC" represents Universal Coordinated Time (UTC). The month specifies a month of the year (January = 1, ...). If any argument to date is NULL the result is NULL. The built-in function day returns the day of the month specified by t. If the argument to day is NULL the result is NULL. The built-in function formatTime returns a textual representation of the time value formatted according to layout, which defines the format by showing how the reference time, would be displayed if it were the value; it serves as an example of the desired output. The same display rules will then be applied to the time value. If any argument to formatTime is NULL the result is NULL. NOTE: The string value of the time zone, like "CET" or "ACDT", is dependent on the time zone of the machine the function is run on. For example, if the t value is in "CET", but the machine is in "ACDT", instead of "CET" the result is "+0100". This is the same what Go (time.Time).String() returns and in fact formatTime directly calls t.String(). returns on a machine in the CET time zone, but may return on a machine in the ACDT zone. The time value is in both cases the same so its ordering and comparing is correct. Only the display value can differ. The built-in functions formatFloat and formatInt format numbers to strings using go's number format functions in the `strconv` package. For all three functions, only the first argument is mandatory. The default values of the rest are shown in the examples. If the first argument is NULL, the result is NULL. returns returns returns Unlike the `strconv` equivalent, the formatInt function handles all integer types, both signed and unsigned. The built-in function hasPrefix tests whether the string s begins with prefix. If any argument to hasPrefix is NULL the result is NULL. The built-in function hasSuffix tests whether the string s ends with suffix. If any argument to hasSuffix is NULL the result is NULL. The built-in function hour returns the hour within the day specified by t, in the range [0, 23]. If the argument to hour is NULL the result is NULL. The built-in function hours returns the duration as a floating point number of hours. If the argument to hours is NULL the result is NULL. The built-in function id takes zero or one arguments. If no argument is provided, id() returns a table-unique automatically assigned numeric identifier of type int. Ids of deleted records are not reused unless the DB becomes completely empty (has no tables). For example If id() without arguments is called for a row which is not a table record then the result value is NULL. For example If id() has one argument it must be a table name of a table in a cross join. For example The built-in function len takes a string argument and returns the lentgh of the string in bytes. The expression len(s) is constant if s is a string constant. If the argument to len is NULL the result is NULL. The built-in aggregate function max returns the largest value of an expression in a record set. Max ignores NULL values, but returns NULL if all values of a column are NULL or if max is applied to an empty record set. The expression values must be of an ordered type. For example The built-in aggregate function min returns the smallest value of an expression in a record set. Min ignores NULL values, but returns NULL if all values of a column are NULL or if min is applied to an empty record set. For example The column values must be of an ordered type. The built-in function minute returns the minute offset within the hour specified by t, in the range [0, 59]. If the argument to minute is NULL the result is NULL. The built-in function minutes returns the duration as a floating point number of minutes. If the argument to minutes is NULL the result is NULL. The built-in function month returns the month of the year specified by t (January = 1, ...). If the argument to month is NULL the result is NULL. The built-in function nanosecond returns the nanosecond offset within the second specified by t, in the range [0, 999999999]. If the argument to nanosecond is NULL the result is NULL. The built-in function nanoseconds returns the duration as an integer nanosecond count. If the argument to nanoseconds is NULL the result is NULL. The built-in function now returns the current local time. The built-in function parseTime parses a formatted string and returns the time value it represents. The layout defines the format by showing how the reference time, would be interpreted if it were the value; it serves as an example of the input format. The same interpretation will then be made to the input string. Elements omitted from the value are assumed to be zero or, when zero is impossible, one, so parsing "3:04pm" returns the time corresponding to Jan 1, year 0, 15:04:00 UTC (note that because the year is 0, this time is before the zero Time). Years must be in the range 0000..9999. The day of the week is checked for syntax but it is otherwise ignored. In the absence of a time zone indicator, parseTime returns a time in UTC. When parsing a time with a zone offset like -0700, if the offset corresponds to a time zone used by the current location, then parseTime uses that location and zone in the returned time. Otherwise it records the time as being in a fabricated location with time fixed at the given zone offset. When parsing a time with a zone abbreviation like MST, if the zone abbreviation has a defined offset in the current location, then that offset is used. The zone abbreviation "UTC" is recognized as UTC regardless of location. If the zone abbreviation is unknown, Parse records the time as being in a fabricated location with the given zone abbreviation and a zero offset. This choice means that such a time can be parses and reformatted with the same layout losslessly, but the exact instant used in the representation will differ by the actual zone offset. To avoid such problems, prefer time layouts that use a numeric zone offset. If any argument to parseTime is NULL the result is NULL. The built-in function second returns the second offset within the minute specified by t, in the range [0, 59]. If the argument to second is NULL the result is NULL. The built-in function seconds returns the duration as a floating point number of seconds. If the argument to seconds is NULL the result is NULL. The built-in function since returns the time elapsed since t. It is shorthand for now()-t. If the argument to since is NULL the result is NULL. The built-in aggregate function sum returns the sum of values of an expression for all rows of a record set. Sum ignores NULL values, but returns NULL if all values of a column are NULL or if sum is applied to an empty record set. The column values must be of a numeric type. The built-in function timeIn returns t with the location information set to loc. For discussion of the loc argument please see date(). If any argument to timeIn is NULL the result is NULL. The built-in function weekday returns the day of the week specified by t. Sunday == 0, Monday == 1, ... If the argument to weekday is NULL the result is NULL. The built-in function year returns the year in which t occurs. If the argument to year is NULL the result is NULL. The built-in function yearDay returns the day of the year specified by t, in the range [1,365] for non-leap years, and [1,366] in leap years. If the argument to yearDay is NULL the result is NULL. Three functions assemble and disassemble complex numbers. The built-in function complex constructs a complex value from a floating-point real and imaginary part, while real and imag extract the real and imaginary parts of a complex value. The type of the arguments and return value correspond. For complex, the two arguments must be of the same floating-point type and the return type is the complex type with the corresponding floating-point constituents: complex64 for float32, complex128 for float64. The real and imag functions together form the inverse, so for a complex value z, z == complex(real(z), imag(z)). If the operands of these functions are all constants, the return value is a constant. If any argument to any of complex, real, imag functions is NULL the result is NULL. For the numeric types, the following sizes are guaranteed Portions of this specification page are modifications based on work[2] created and shared by Google[3] and used according to terms described in the Creative Commons 3.0 Attribution License[4]. This specification is licensed under the Creative Commons Attribution 3.0 License, and code is licensed under a BSD license[5]. Links from the above documentation This section is not part of the specification. WARNING: The implementation of indices is new and it surely needs more time to become mature. Indices are used currently used only by the WHERE clause. The following expression patterns of 'WHERE expression' are recognized and trigger index use. The relOp is one of the relation operators <, <=, ==, >=, >. For the equality operator both operands must be of comparable types. For all other operators both operands must be of ordered types. The constant expression is a compile time constant expression. Some constant folding is still a TODO. Parameter is a QL parameter ($1 etc.). Consider tables t and u, both with an indexed field f. The WHERE expression doesn't comply with the above simple detected cases. However, such query is now automatically rewritten to which will use both of the indices. The impact of using the indices can be substantial (cf. BenchmarkCrossJoin*) if the resulting rows have low "selectivity", ie. only few rows from both tables are selected by the respective WHERE filtering. Note: Existing QL DBs can be used and indices can be added to them. However, once any indices are present in the DB, the old QL versions cannot work with such DB anymore. Running a benchmark with -v (-test.v) outputs information about the scale used to report records/s and a brief description of the benchmark. For example Running the full suite of benchmarks takes a lot of time. Use the -timeout flag to avoid them being killed after the default time limit (10 minutes).

v1.2.0 • 6 years ago

github.com/decred/dcrd/database

Package database provides a block and metadata storage database. This package provides a database layer to store and retrieve block data and arbitrary metadata in a simple and efficient manner. The default backend, ffldb, has a strong focus on speed, efficiency, and robustness. It makes use leveldb for the metadata, flat files for block storage, and strict checksums in key areas to ensure data integrity. A quick overview of the features database provides are as follows: The main entry point is the DB interface. It exposes functionality for transactional-based access and storage of metadata and block data. It is obtained via the Create and Open functions which take a database type string that identifies the specific database driver (backend) to use as well as arguments specific to the specified driver. The Namespace interface is an abstraction that provides facilities for obtaining transactions (the Tx interface) that are the basis of all database reads and writes. Unlike some database interfaces that support reading and writing without transactions, this interface requires transactions even when only reading or writing a single key. The Begin function provides an unmanaged transaction while the View and Update functions provide a managed transaction. These are described in more detail below. The Tx interface provides facilities for rolling back or committing changes that took place while the transaction was active. It also provides the root metadata bucket under which all keys, values, and nested buckets are stored. A transaction can either be read-only or read-write and managed or unmanaged. A managed transaction is one where the caller provides a function to execute within the context of the transaction and the commit or rollback is handled automatically depending on whether or not the provided function returns an error. Attempting to manually call Rollback or Commit on the managed transaction will result in a panic. An unmanaged transaction, on the other hand, requires the caller to manually call Commit or Rollback when they are finished with it. Leaving transactions open for long periods of time can have several adverse effects, so it is recommended that managed transactions are used instead. The Bucket interface provides the ability to manipulate key/value pairs and nested buckets as well as iterate through them. The Get, Put, and Delete functions work with key/value pairs, while the Bucket, CreateBucket, CreateBucketIfNotExists, and DeleteBucket functions work with buckets. The ForEach function allows the caller to provide a function to be called with each key/value pair and nested bucket in the current bucket. As discussed above, all of the functions which are used to manipulate key/value pairs and nested buckets exist on the Bucket interface. The root metadata bucket is the upper-most bucket in which data is stored and is created at the same time as the database. Use the Metadata function on the Tx interface to retrieve it. The CreateBucket and CreateBucketIfNotExists functions on the Bucket interface provide the ability to create an arbitrary number of nested buckets. It is a good idea to avoid a lot of buckets with little data in them as it could lead to poor page utilization depending on the specific driver in use. This example demonstrates creating a new database and using a managed read-write transaction to store and retrieve metadata. This example demonstrates creating a new database, using a managed read-write transaction to store a block, and using a managed read-only transaction to fetch the block.

v1.1.1 • last year

github.com/snowflakedb/gosnowflake

Package gosnowflake is a pure Go Snowflake driver for the database/sql package. Clients can use the database/sql package directly. For example: Use the Open() function to create a database handle with connection parameters: The Go Snowflake Driver supports the following connection syntaxes (or data source name (DSN) formats): where all parameters must be escaped or use Config and DSN to construct a DSN string. For information about account identifiers, see the Snowflake documentation (https://docs.snowflake.com/en/user-guide/admin-account-identifier.html). The following example opens a database handle with the Snowflake account named "my_account" under the organization named "my_organization", where the username is "jsmith", password is "mypassword", database is "mydb", schema is "testschema", and warehouse is "mywh": The connection string (DSN) can contain both connection parameters (described below) and session parameters (https://docs.snowflake.com/en/sql-reference/parameters.html). The following connection parameters are supported: account <string>: Specifies your Snowflake account, where "<string>" is the account identifier assigned to your account by Snowflake. For information about account identifiers, see the Snowflake documentation (https://docs.snowflake.com/en/user-guide/admin-account-identifier.html). If you are using a global URL, then append the connection group and ".global" (e.g. "<account_identifier>-<connection_group>.global"). The account identifier and the connection group are separated by a dash ("-"), as shown above. This parameter is optional if your account identifier is specified after the "@" character in the connection string. region <string>: DEPRECATED. You may specify a region, such as "eu-central-1", with this parameter. However, since this parameter is deprecated, it is best to specify the region as part of the account parameter. For details, see the description of the account parameter. database: Specifies the database to use by default in the client session (can be changed after login). schema: Specifies the database schema to use by default in the client session (can be changed after login). warehouse: Specifies the virtual warehouse to use by default for queries, loading, etc. in the client session (can be changed after login). role: Specifies the role to use by default for accessing Snowflake objects in the client session (can be changed after login). passcode: Specifies the passcode provided by Duo when using multi-factor authentication (MFA) for login. passcodeInPassword: false by default. Set to true if the MFA passcode is embedded in the login password. Appends the MFA passcode to the end of the password. loginTimeout: Specifies the timeout, in seconds, for login. The default is 60 seconds. The login request gives up after the timeout length if the HTTP response is success. requestTimeout: Specifies the timeout, in seconds, for a query to complete. 0 (zero) specifies that the driver should wait indefinitely. The default is 0 seconds. The query request gives up after the timeout length if the HTTP response is success. authenticator: Specifies the authenticator to use for authenticating user credentials: To use the internal Snowflake authenticator, specify snowflake (Default). If you want to cache your MFA logins, use AuthTypeUsernamePasswordMFA authenticator. To authenticate through Okta, specify https://<okta_account_name>.okta.com (URL prefix for Okta). To authenticate using your IDP via a browser, specify externalbrowser. To authenticate via OAuth, specify oauth and provide an OAuth Access Token (see the token parameter below). application: Identifies your application to Snowflake Support. insecureMode: false by default. Set to true to bypass the Online Certificate Status Protocol (OCSP) certificate revocation check. IMPORTANT: Change the default value for testing or emergency situations only. token: a token that can be used to authenticate. Should be used in conjunction with the "oauth" authenticator. client_session_keep_alive: Set to true have a heartbeat in the background every hour to keep the connection alive such that the connection session will never expire. Care should be taken in using this option as it opens up the access forever as long as the process is alive. ocspFailOpen: true by default. Set to false to make OCSP check fail closed mode. validateDefaultParameters: true by default. Set to false to disable checks on existence and privileges check for Database, Schema, Warehouse and Role when setting up the connection tracing: Specifies the logging level to be used. Set to error by default. Valid values are trace, debug, info, print, warning, error, fatal, panic. disableQueryContextCache: disables parsing of query context returned from server and resending it to server as well. Default value is false. clientConfigFile: specifies the location of the client configuration json file. In this file you can configure Easy Logging feature. disableSamlURLCheck: disables the SAML URL check. Default value is false. All other parameters are interpreted as session parameters (https://docs.snowflake.com/en/sql-reference/parameters.html). For example, the TIMESTAMP_OUTPUT_FORMAT session parameter can be set by adding: A complete connection string looks similar to the following: Session-level parameters can also be set by using the SQL command "ALTER SESSION" (https://docs.snowflake.com/en/sql-reference/sql/alter-session.html). Alternatively, use OpenWithConfig() function to create a database handle with the specified Config. # Connection Config You can also connect to your warehouse using the connection config. The dbSql library states that when you want to take advantage of driver-specific connection features that aren’t available in a connection string. Each driver supports its own set of connection properties, often providing ways to customize the connection request specific to the DBMS For example: If you are using this method, you dont need to pass a driver name to specify the driver type in which you are looking to connect. Since the driver name is not needed, you can optionally bypass driver registration on startup. To do this, set `GOSNOWFLAKE_SKIP_REGISTERATION` in your environment. This is useful you wish to register multiple verions of the driver. Note: GOSNOWFLAKE_SKIP_REGISTERATION should not be used if sql.Open() is used as the method to connect to the server, as sql.Open will require registration so it can map the driver name to the driver type, which in this case is "snowflake" and SnowflakeDriver{}. You can load the connnection configuration with .toml file format. With two environment variables SNOWFLAKE_HOME(connections.toml file directory) SNOWFLAKE_DEFAULT_CONNECTION_NAME(DSN name), the driver will search the config file and load the connection. You can find how to use this connection way at ./cmd/tomlfileconnection or Snowflake doc: https://docs.snowflake.com/en/developer-guide/snowflake-cli-v2/connecting/specify-credentials The Go Snowflake Driver honors the environment variables HTTP_PROXY, HTTPS_PROXY and NO_PROXY for the forward proxy setting. NO_PROXY specifies which hostname endings should be allowed to bypass the proxy server, e.g. no_proxy=.amazonaws.com means that Amazon S3 access does not need to go through the proxy. NO_PROXY does not support wildcards. Each value specified should be one of the following: The end of a hostname (or a complete hostname), for example: ".amazonaws.com" or "xy12345.snowflakecomputing.com". An IP address, for example "192.196.1.15". If more than one value is specified, values should be separated by commas, for example: By default, the driver's builtin logger is exposing logrus's FieldLogger and default at INFO level. Users can use SetLogger in driver.go to set a customized logger for gosnowflake package. In order to enable debug logging for the driver, user could use SetLogLevel("debug") in SFLogger interface as shown in demo code at cmd/logger.go. To redirect the logs SFlogger.SetOutput method could do the work. A custom query tag can be set in the context. Each query run with this context will include the custom query tag as metadata that will appear in the Query Tag column in the Query History log. For example: A specific query request ID can be set in the context and will be passed through in place of the default randomized request ID. For example: If you need query ID for your query you have to use raw connection. For queries: ``` ``` For execs: ``` ``` The result of your query can be retrieved by setting the query ID in the WithFetchResultByID context. ``` ``` From 0.5.0, a signal handling responsibility has moved to the applications. If you want to cancel a query/command by Ctrl+C, add a os.Interrupt trap in context to execute methods that can take the context parameter (e.g. QueryContext, ExecContext). See cmd/selectmany.go for the full example. The Go Snowflake Driver now supports the Arrow data format for data transfers between Snowflake and the Golang client. The Arrow data format avoids extra conversions between binary and textual representations of the data. The Arrow data format can improve performance and reduce memory consumption in clients. Snowflake continues to support the JSON data format. The data format is controlled by the session-level parameter GO_QUERY_RESULT_FORMAT. To use JSON format, execute: The valid values for the parameter are: If the user attempts to set the parameter to an invalid value, an error is returned. The parameter name and the parameter value are case-insensitive. This parameter can be set only at the session level. Usage notes: The Arrow data format reduces rounding errors in floating point numbers. You might see slightly different values for floating point numbers when using Arrow format than when using JSON format. In order to take advantage of the increased precision, you must pass in the context.Context object provided by the WithHigherPrecision function when querying. Traditionally, the rows.Scan() method returned a string when a variable of types interface was passed in. Turning on the flag ENABLE_HIGHER_PRECISION via WithHigherPrecision will return the natural, expected data type as well. For some numeric data types, the driver can retrieve larger values when using the Arrow format than when using the JSON format. For example, using Arrow format allows the full range of SQL NUMERIC(38,0) values to be retrieved, while using JSON format allows only values in the range supported by the Golang int64 data type. Users should ensure that Golang variables are declared using the appropriate data type for the full range of values contained in the column. For an example, see below. When using the Arrow format, the driver supports more Golang data types and more ways to convert SQL values to those Golang data types. The table below lists the supported Snowflake SQL data types and the corresponding Golang data types. The columns are: The SQL data type. The default Golang data type that is returned when you use snowflakeRows.Scan() to read data from Arrow data format via an interface{}. The possible Golang data types that can be returned when you use snowflakeRows.Scan() to read data from Arrow data format directly. The default Golang data type that is returned when you use snowflakeRows.Scan() to read data from JSON data format via an interface{}. (All returned values are strings.) The standard Golang data type that is returned when you use snowflakeRows.Scan() to read data from JSON data format directly. Go Data Types for Scan() =================================================================================================================== | ARROW | JSON =================================================================================================================== SQL Data Type | Default Go Data Type | Supported Go Data | Default Go Data Type | Supported Go Data | for Scan() interface{} | Types for Scan() | for Scan() interface{} | Types for Scan() =================================================================================================================== BOOLEAN | bool | string | bool ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- VARCHAR | string | string ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- DOUBLE | float32, float64 [1] , [2] | string | float32, float64 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- INTEGER that | int, int8, int16, int32, int64 | string | int, int8, int16, fits in int64 | [1] , [2] | | int32, int64 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- INTEGER that doesn't | int, int8, int16, int32, int64, *big.Int | string | error fit in int64 | [1] , [2] , [3] , [4] | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- NUMBER(P, S) | float32, float64, *big.Float | string | float32, float64 where S > 0 | [1] , [2] , [3] , [5] | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- DATE | time.Time | string | time.Time ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- TIME | time.Time | string | time.Time ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- TIMESTAMP_LTZ | time.Time | string | time.Time ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- TIMESTAMP_NTZ | time.Time | string | time.Time ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- TIMESTAMP_TZ | time.Time | string | time.Time ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- BINARY | []byte | string | []byte ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- ARRAY [6] | string / array | string / array ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OBJECT [6] | string / struct | string / struct ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- VARIANT | string | string ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- MAP | map | map [1] Converting from a higher precision data type to a lower precision data type via the snowflakeRows.Scan() method can lose low bits (lose precision), lose high bits (completely change the value), or result in error. [2] Attempting to convert from a higher precision data type to a lower precision data type via interface{} causes an error. [3] Higher precision data types like *big.Int and *big.Float can be accessed by querying with a context returned by WithHigherPrecision(). [4] You cannot directly Scan() into the alternative data types via snowflakeRows.Scan(), but can convert to those data types by using .Int64()/.String()/.Uint64() methods. For an example, see below. [5] You cannot directly Scan() into the alternative data types via snowflakeRows.Scan(), but can convert to those data types by using .Float32()/.String()/.Float64() methods. For an example, see below. [6] Arrays and objects can be either semistructured or structured, see more info in section below. Note: SQL NULL values are converted to Golang nil values, and vice-versa. Snowflake supports two flavours of "structured data" - semistructured and structured. Semistructured types are variants, objects and arrays without schema. When data is fetched, it's represented as strings and the client is responsible for its interpretation. Example table definition: The data not have any corresponding schema, so values in table may be slightly different. Semistuctured variants, objects and arrays are always represented as strings for scanning: When inserting, a marker indicating correct type must be used, for example: Structured types differentiate from semistructured types by having specific schema. In all rows of the table, values must conform to this schema. Example table definition: To retrieve structured objects, follow these steps: 1. Create a struct implementing sql.Scanner interface, example: a) b) Automatic scan goes through all fields in a struct and read object fields. Struct fields have to be public. Embedded structs have to be pointers. Matching name is built using struct field name with first letter lowercase. Additionally, `sf` tag can be added: - first value is always a name of a field in an SQL object - additionally `ignore` parameter can be passed to omit this field 2. Use WithStructuredTypesEnabled context while querying data. 3. Use it in regular scan: See StructuredObject for all available operations including null support, embedding nested structs, etc. Retrieving array of simple types works exactly the same like normal values - using Scan function. You can use WithMapValuesNullable and WithArrayValuesNullable contexts to handle null values in, respectively, maps and arrays of simple types in the database. In that case, sql null types will be used: If you want to scan array of structs, you have to use a helper function ScanArrayOfScanners: Retrieving structured maps is very similar to retrieving arrays: To bind structured objects use: 1. Create a type which implements a StructuredObjectWriter interface, example: a) b) 2. Use an instance as regular bind. 3. If you need to bind nil value, use special syntax: Binding structured arrays are like any other parameter. The only difference is - if you want to insert empty array (not nil but empty), you have to use: The following example shows how to retrieve very large values using the math/big package. This example retrieves a large INTEGER value to an interface and then extracts a big.Int value from that interface. If the value fits into an int64, then the code also copies the value to a variable of type int64. Note that a context that enables higher precision must be passed in with the query. If the variable named "rows" is known to contain a big.Int, then you can use the following instead of scanning into an interface and then converting to a big.Int: If the variable named "rows" contains a big.Int, then each of the following fails: Similar code and rules also apply to big.Float values. If you are not sure what data type will be returned, you can use code similar to the following to check the data type of the returned value: You can retrieve data in a columnar format similar to the format a server returns, without transposing them to rows. When working with the arrow columnar format in go driver, ArrowBatch structs are used. These are structs mostly corresponding to data chunks received from the backend. They allow for access to specific arrow.Record structs. An ArrowBatch can exist in a state where the underlying data has not yet been loaded. The data is downloaded and translated only on demand. Translation options are retrieved from a context.Context interface, which is either passed from query context or set by the user using WithContext(ctx) method. In order to access them you must use `WithArrowBatches` context, similar to the following: This returns []*ArrowBatch. ArrowBatch functions: GetRowCount(): Returns the number of rows in the ArrowBatch. Note that this returns 0 if the data has not yet been loaded, irrespective of it’s actual size. WithContext(ctx context.Context): Sets the context of the ArrowBatch to the one provided. Note that the context will not retroactively apply to data that has already been downloaded. For example: will produce the same result in records1 and records2, irrespective of the newly provided ctx. Context worth noting are: -WithArrowBatchesTimestampOption -WithHigherPrecision -WithArrowBatchesUtf8Validation described in more detail later. Fetch(): Returns the underlying records as *[]arrow.Record. When this function is called, the ArrowBatch checks whether the underlying data has already been loaded, and downloads it if not. Limitations: How to handle timestamps in Arrow batches: Snowflake returns timestamps natively (from backend to driver) in multiple formats. The Arrow timestamp is an 8-byte data type, which is insufficient to handle the larger date and time ranges used by Snowflake. Also, Snowflake supports 0-9 (nanosecond) digit precision for seconds, while Arrow supports only 3 (millisecond), 6 (microsecond), an 9 (nanosecond) precision. Consequently, Snowflake uses a custom timestamp format in Arrow, which differs on timestamp type and precision. If you want to use timestamps in Arrow batches, you have two options: How to handle invalid UTF-8 characters in Arrow batches: Snowflake previously allowed users to upload data with invalid UTF-8 characters. Consequently, Arrow records containing string columns in Snowflake could include these invalid UTF-8 characters. However, according to the Arrow specifications (https://arrow.apache.org/docs/cpp/api/datatype.html and https://github.com/apache/arrow/blob/a03d957b5b8d0425f9d5b6c98b6ee1efa56a1248/go/arrow/datatype.go#L73-L74), Arrow string columns should only contain UTF-8 characters. To address this issue and prevent potential downstream disruptions, the context WithArrowBatchesUtf8Validation, is introduced. When enabled, this feature iterates through all values in string columns, identifying and replacing any invalid characters with `�`. This ensures that Arrow records conform to the UTF-8 standards, preventing validation failures in downstream services like the Rust Arrow library that impose strict validation checks. How to handle higher precision in Arrow batches: To preserve BigDecimal values within Arrow batches, use WithHigherPrecision. This offers two main benefits: it helps avoid precision loss and defers the conversion to upstream services. Alternatively, without this setting, all non-zero scale numbers will be converted to float64, potentially resulting in loss of precision. Zero-scale numbers (DECIMAL256, DECIMAL128) will be converted to int64, which could lead to overflow. Binding allows a SQL statement to use a value that is stored in a Golang variable. Without binding, a SQL statement specifies values by specifying literals inside the statement. For example, the following statement uses the literal value “42“ in an UPDATE statement: With binding, you can execute a SQL statement that uses a value that is inside a variable. For example: The “?“ inside the “VALUES“ clause specifies that the SQL statement uses the value from a variable. Binding data that involves time zones can require special handling. For details, see the section titled "Timestamps with Time Zones". Version 1.6.23 (and later) of the driver takes advantage of sql.Null types which enables the proper handling of null parameters inside function calls, i.e.: The timestamp nullability had to be achieved by wrapping the sql.NullTime type as the Snowflake provides several date and time types which are mapped to single Go time.Time type: Version 1.3.9 (and later) of the Go Snowflake Driver supports the ability to bind an array variable to a parameter in a SQL INSERT statement. You can use this technique to insert multiple rows in a single batch. As an example, the following code inserts rows into a table that contains integer, float, boolean, and string columns. The example binds arrays to the parameters in the INSERT statement. If the array contains SQL NULL values, use slice []interface{}, which allows Golang nil values. This feature is available in version 1.6.12 (and later) of the driver. For example, For slices []interface{} containing time.Time values, a binding parameter flag is required for the preceding array variable in the Array() function. This feature is available in version 1.6.13 (and later) of the driver. For example, Note: For alternative ways to load data into the Snowflake database (including bulk loading using the COPY command), see Loading Data into Snowflake (https://docs.snowflake.com/en/user-guide-data-load.html). When you use array binding to insert a large number of values, the driver can improve performance by streaming the data (without creating files on the local machine) to a temporary stage for ingestion. The driver automatically does this when the number of values exceeds a threshold (no changes are needed to user code). In order for the driver to send the data to a temporary stage, the user must have the following privilege on the schema: If the user does not have this privilege, the driver falls back to sending the data with the query to the Snowflake database. In addition, the current database and schema for the session must be set. If these are not set, the CREATE TEMPORARY STAGE command executed by the driver can fail with the following error: For alternative ways to load data into the Snowflake database (including bulk loading using the COPY command), see Loading Data into Snowflake (https://docs.snowflake.com/en/user-guide-data-load.html). Go's database/sql package supports the ability to bind a parameter in a SQL statement to a time.Time variable. However, when the client binds data to send to the server, the driver cannot determine the correct Snowflake date/timestamp data type to associate with the binding parameter. For example: To resolve this issue, a binding parameter flag is introduced that associates any subsequent time.Time type to the DATE, TIME, TIMESTAMP_LTZ, TIMESTAMP_NTZ or BINARY data type. The above example could be rewritten as follows: The driver fetches TIMESTAMP_TZ (timestamp with time zone) data using the offset-based Location types, which represent a collection of time offsets in use in a geographical area, such as CET (Central European Time) or UTC (Coordinated Universal Time). The offset-based Location data is generated and cached when a Go Snowflake Driver application starts, and if the given offset is not in the cache, it is generated dynamically. Currently, Snowflake does not support the name-based Location types (e.g. "America/Los_Angeles"). For more information about Location types, see the Go documentation for https://golang.org/pkg/time/#Location. Internally, this feature leverages the []byte data type. As a result, BINARY data cannot be bound without the binding parameter flag. In the following example, sf is an alias for the gosnowflake package: The driver directly downloads a result set from the cloud storage if the size is large. It is required to shift workloads from the Snowflake database to the clients for scale. The download takes place by goroutine named "Chunk Downloader" asynchronously so that the driver can fetch the next result set while the application can consume the current result set. The application may change the number of result set chunk downloader if required. Note this does not help reduce memory footprint by itself. Consider Custom JSON Decoder. Custom JSON Decoder for Parsing Result Set (Experimental) The application may have the driver use a custom JSON decoder that incrementally parses the result set as follows. This option will reduce the memory footprint to half or even quarter, but it can significantly degrade the performance depending on the environment. The test cases running on Travis Ubuntu box show five times less memory footprint while four times slower. Be cautious when using the option. The Go Snowflake Driver supports JWT (JSON Web Token) authentication. To enable this feature, construct the DSN with fields "authenticator=SNOWFLAKE_JWT&privateKey=<your_private_key>", or using a Config structure specifying: The <your_private_key> should be a base64 URL encoded PKCS8 rsa private key string. One way to encode a byte slice to URL base 64 URL format is through the base64.URLEncoding.EncodeToString() function. On the server side, you can alter the public key with the SQL command: The <your_public_key> should be a base64 Standard encoded PKI public key string. One way to encode a byte slice to base 64 Standard format is through the base64.StdEncoding.EncodeToString() function. To generate the valid key pair, you can execute the following commands in the shell: Note: As of February 2020, Golang's official library does not support passcode-encrypted PKCS8 private key. For security purposes, Snowflake highly recommends that you store the passcode-encrypted private key on the disk and decrypt the key in your application using a library you trust. JWT tokens are recreated on each retry and they are valid (`exp` claim) for `jwtTimeout` seconds. Each retry timeout is configured by `jwtClientTimeout`. Retries are limited by total time of `loginTimeout`. The driver allows to authenticate using the external browser. When a connection is created, the driver will open the browser window and ask the user to sign in. To enable this feature, construct the DSN with field "authenticator=EXTERNALBROWSER" or using a Config structure with following Authenticator specified: The external browser authentication implements timeout mechanism. This prevents the driver from hanging interminably when browser window was closed, or not responding. Timeout defaults to 120s and can be changed through setting DSN field "externalBrowserTimeout=240" (time in seconds) or using a Config structure with following ExternalBrowserTimeout specified: This feature is available in version 1.3.8 or later of the driver. By default, Snowflake returns an error for queries issued with multiple statements. This restriction helps protect against SQL Injection attacks (https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/SQL_injection). The multi-statement feature allows users skip this restriction and execute multiple SQL statements through a single Golang function call. However, this opens up the possibility for SQL injection, so it should be used carefully. The risk can be reduced by specifying the exact number of statements to be executed, which makes it more difficult to inject a statement by appending it. More details are below. The Go Snowflake Driver provides two functions that can execute multiple SQL statements in a single call: To compose a multi-statement query, simply create a string that contains all the queries, separated by semicolons, in the order in which the statements should be executed. To protect against SQL Injection attacks while using the multi-statement feature, pass a Context that specifies the number of statements in the string. For example: When multiple queries are executed by a single call to QueryContext(), multiple result sets are returned. After you process the first result set, get the next result set (for the next SQL statement) by calling NextResultSet(). The following pseudo-code shows how to process multiple result sets: The function db.ExecContext() returns a single result, which is the sum of the number of rows changed by each individual statement. For example, if your multi-statement query executed two UPDATE statements, each of which updated 10 rows, then the result returned would be 20. Individual row counts for individual statements are not available. The following code shows how to retrieve the result of a multi-statement query executed through db.ExecContext(): Note: Because a multi-statement ExecContext() returns a single value, you cannot detect offsetting errors. For example, suppose you expected the return value to be 20 because you expected each UPDATE statement to update 10 rows. If one UPDATE statement updated 15 rows and the other UPDATE statement updated only 5 rows, the total would still be 20. You would see no indication that the UPDATES had not functioned as expected. The ExecContext() function does not return an error if passed a query (e.g. a SELECT statement). However, it still returns only a single value, not a result set, so using it to execute queries (or a mix of queries and non-query statements) is impractical. The QueryContext() function does not return an error if passed non-query statements (e.g. DML). The function returns a result set for each statement, whether or not the statement is a query. For each non-query statement, the result set contains a single row that contains a single column; the value is the number of rows changed by the statement. If you want to execute a mix of query and non-query statements (e.g. a mix of SELECT and DML statements) in a multi-statement query, use QueryContext(). You can retrieve the result sets for the queries, and you can retrieve or ignore the row counts for the non-query statements. Note: PUT statements are not supported for multi-statement queries. If a SQL statement passed to ExecQuery() or QueryContext() fails to compile or execute, that statement is aborted, and subsequent statements are not executed. Any statements prior to the aborted statement are unaffected. For example, if the statements below are run as one multi-statement query, the multi-statement query fails on the third statement, and an exception is thrown. If you then query the contents of the table named "test", the values 1 and 2 would be present. When using the QueryContext() and ExecContext() functions, golang code can check for errors the usual way. For example: Preparing statements and using bind variables are also not supported for multi-statement queries. The Go Snowflake Driver supports asynchronous execution of SQL statements. Asynchronous execution allows you to start executing a statement and then retrieve the result later without being blocked while waiting. While waiting for the result of a SQL statement, you can perform other tasks, including executing other SQL statements. Most of the steps to execute an asynchronous query are the same as the steps to execute a synchronous query. However, there is an additional step, which is that you must call the WithAsyncMode() function to update your Context object to specify that asynchronous mode is enabled. In the code below, the call to "WithAsyncMode()" is specific to asynchronous mode. The rest of the code is compatible with both asynchronous mode and synchronous mode. The function db.QueryContext() returns an object of type snowflakeRows regardless of whether the query is synchronous or asynchronous. However: The call to the Next() function of snowflakeRows is always synchronous (i.e. blocking). If the query has not yet completed and the snowflakeRows object (named "rows" in this example) has not been filled in yet, then rows.Next() waits until the result set has been filled in. More generally, calls to any Golang SQL API function implemented in snowflakeRows or snowflakeResult are blocking calls, and wait if results are not yet available. (Examples of other synchronous calls include: snowflakeRows.Err(), snowflakeRows.Columns(), snowflakeRows.columnTypes(), snowflakeRows.Scan(), and snowflakeResult.RowsAffected().) Because the example code above executes only one query and no other activity, there is no significant difference in behavior between asynchronous and synchronous behavior. The differences become significant if, for example, you want to perform some other activity after the query starts and before it completes. The example code below starts a query, which run in the background, and then retrieves the results later. This example uses small SELECT statements that do not retrieve enough data to require asynchronous handling. However, the technique works for larger data sets, and for situations where the programmer might want to do other work after starting the queries and before retrieving the results. For a more elaborative example please see cmd/async/async.go The Go Snowflake Driver supports the PUT and GET commands. The PUT command copies a file from a local computer (the computer where the Golang client is running) to a stage on the cloud platform. The GET command copies data files from a stage on the cloud platform to a local computer. See the following for information on the syntax and supported parameters: Using PUT: The following example shows how to run a PUT command by passing a string to the db.Query() function: "<local_file>" should include the file path as well as the name. Snowflake recommends using an absolute path rather than a relative path. For example: Different client platforms (e.g. linux, Windows) have different path name conventions. Ensure that you specify path names appropriately. This is particularly important on Windows, which uses the backslash character as both an escape character and as a separator in path names. To send information from a stream (rather than a file) use code similar to the code below. (The ReplaceAll() function is needed on Windows to handle backslashes in the path to the file.) Note: PUT statements are not supported for multi-statement queries. Using GET: The following example shows how to run a GET command by passing a string to the db.Query() function: "<local_file>" should include the file path as well as the name. Snowflake recommends using an absolute path rather than a relative path. For example: To download a file into an in-memory stream (rather than a file) use code similar to the code below. Note: GET statements are not supported for multi-statement queries. Specifying temporary directory for encryption and compression: Putting and getting requires compression and/or encryption, which is done in the OS temporary directory. If you cannot use default temporary directory for your OS or you want to specify it yourself, you can use "tmpDirPath" DSN parameter. Remember, to encode slashes. Example: Using custom configuration for PUT/GET: If you want to override some default configuration options, you can use `WithFileTransferOptions` context. There are multiple config parameters including progress bars or compression.

v1.12.0 • 3 weeks ago

github.com/oracle/oci-go-sdk

This is the official Go SDK for Oracle Cloud Infrastructure Refer to https://github.com/oracle/oci-go-sdk/blob/master/README.md#installing for installation instructions. Refer to https://github.com/oracle/oci-go-sdk/blob/master/README.md#configuring for configuration instructions. The following example shows how to get started with the SDK. The example belows creates an identityClient struct with the default configuration. It then utilizes the identityClient to list availability domains and prints them out to stdout More examples can be found in the SDK Github repo: https://github.com/oracle/oci-go-sdk/tree/master/example Optional fields are represented with the `mandatory:"false"` tag on input structs. The SDK will omit all optional fields that are nil when making requests. In the case of enum-type fields, the SDK will omit fields whose value is an empty string. The SDK uses pointers for primitive types in many input structs. To aid in the construction of such structs, the SDK provides functions that return a pointer for a given value. For example: The SDK exposes functionality that allows the user to customize any http request before is sent to the service. You can do so by setting the `Interceptor` field in any of the `Client` structs. For example: The Interceptor closure gets called before the signing process, thus any changes done to the request will be properly signed and submitted to the service. The SDK exposes a stand-alone signer that can be used to signing custom requests. Related code can be found here: https://github.com/oracle/oci-go-sdk/blob/master/common/http_signer.go. The example below shows how to create a default signer. The signer also allows more granular control on the headers used for signing. For example: You can combine a custom signer with the exposed clients in the SDK. This allows you to add custom signed headers to the request. Following is an example: Bear in mind that some services have a white list of headers that it expects to be signed. Therefore, adding an arbitrary header can result in authentications errors. To see a runnable example, see https://github.com/oracle/oci-go-sdk/blob/master/example/example_identity_test.go For more information on the signing algorithm refer to: https://docs.cloud.oracle.com/Content/API/Concepts/signingrequests.htm Some operations accept or return polymorphic JSON objects. The SDK models such objects as interfaces. Further the SDK provides structs that implement such interfaces. Thus, for all operations that expect interfaces as input, pass the struct in the SDK that satisfies such interface. For example: In the case of a polymorphic response you can type assert the interface to the expected type. For example: An example of polymorphic JSON request handling can be found here: https://github.com/oracle/oci-go-sdk/blob/master/example/example_core_test.go#L63 When calling a list operation, the operation will retrieve a page of results. To retrieve more data, call the list operation again, passing in the value of the most recent response's OpcNextPage as the value of Page in the next list operation call. When there is no more data the OpcNextPage field will be nil. An example of pagination using this logic can be found here: https://github.com/oracle/oci-go-sdk/blob/master/example/example_core_pagination_test.go The SDK has a built-in logging mechanism used internally. The internal logging logic is used to record the raw http requests, responses and potential errors when (un)marshalling request and responses. Built-in logging in the SDK is controlled via the environment variable "OCI_GO_SDK_DEBUG" and its contents. The below are possible values for the "OCI_GO_SDK_DEBUG" variable 1. "info" or "i" enables all info logging messages 2. "debug" or "d" enables all debug and info logging messages 3. "verbose" or "v" or "1" enables all verbose, debug and info logging messages 4. "null" turns all logging messages off. If the value of the environment variable does not match any of the above then default logging level is "info". If the environment variable is not present then no logging messages are emitted. The default destination for logging is Stderr and if you want to output log to a file you can set via environment variable "OCI_GO_SDK_LOG_OUTPUT_MODE". The below are possible values 1. "file" or "f" enables all logging output saved to file 2. "combine" or "c" enables all logging output to both stderr and file You can also customize the log file location and name via "OCI_GO_SDK_LOG_FILE" environment variable, the value should be the path to a specific file If this environment variable is not present, the default location will be the project root path Sometimes you may need to wait until an attribute of a resource, such as an instance or a VCN, reaches a certain state. An example of this would be launching an instance and then waiting for the instance to become available, or waiting until a subnet in a VCN has been terminated. You might also want to retry the same operation again if there's network issue etc... This can be accomplished by using the RequestMetadata.RetryPolicy. You can find the examples here: https://github.com/oracle/oci-go-sdk/blob/master/example/example_retry_test.go The GO SDK uses the net/http package to make calls to OCI services. If your environment requires you to use a proxy server for outgoing HTTP requests then you can set this up in the following ways: 1. Configuring environment variable as described here https://golang.org/pkg/net/http/#ProxyFromEnvironment 2. Modifying the underlying Transport struct for a service client In order to modify the underlying Transport struct in HttpClient, you can do something similar to (sample code for audit service client): The Object Storage service supports multipart uploads to make large object uploads easier by splitting the large object into parts. The Go SDK supports raw multipart upload operations for advanced use cases, as well as a higher level upload class that uses the multipart upload APIs. For links to the APIs used for multipart upload operations, see Managing Multipart Uploads (https://docs.cloud.oracle.com/iaas/Content/Object/Tasks/usingmultipartuploads.htm). Higher level multipart uploads are implemented using the UploadManager, which will: split a large object into parts for you, upload the parts in parallel, and then recombine and commit the parts as a single object in storage. This code sample shows how to use the UploadManager to automatically split an object into parts for upload to simplify interaction with the Object Storage service: https://github.com/oracle/oci-go-sdk/blob/master/example/example_objectstorage_test.go Some response fields are enum-typed. In the future, individual services may return values not covered by existing enums for that field. To address this possibility, every enum-type response field is a modeled as a type that supports any string. Thus if a service returns a value that is not recognized by your version of the SDK, then the response field will be set to this value. When individual services return a polymorphic JSON response not available as a concrete struct, the SDK will return an implementation that only satisfies the interface modeling the polymorphic JSON response. If you are using a version of the SDK released prior to the announcement of a new region, you may need to use a workaround to reach it, depending on whether the region is in the oraclecloud.com realm. A region is a localized geographic area. For more information on regions and how to identify them, see Regions and Availability Domains(https://docs.cloud.oracle.com/iaas/Content/General/Concepts/regions.htm). A realm is a set of regions that share entities. You can identify your realm by looking at the domain name at the end of the network address. For example, the realm for xyz.abc.123.oraclecloud.com is oraclecloud.com. oraclecloud.com Realm: For regions in the oraclecloud.com realm, even if common.Region does not contain the new region, the forward compatibility of the SDK can automatically handle it. You can pass new region names just as you would pass ones that are already defined. For more information on passing region names in the configuration, see Configuring (https://github.com/oracle/oci-go-sdk/blob/master/README.md#configuring). For details on common.Region, see (https://github.com/oracle/oci-go-sdk/blob/master/common/common.go). Other Realms: For regions in realms other than oraclecloud.com, you can use the following workarounds to reach new regions with earlier versions of the SDK. NOTE: Be sure to supply the appropriate endpoints for your region. You can overwrite the target host with client.Host: If you are authenticating via instance principals, you can set the authentication endpoint in an environment variable: Got a fix for a bug, or a new feature you'd like to contribute? The SDK is open source and accepting pull requests on GitHub https://github.com/oracle/oci-go-sdk Licensing information available at: https://github.com/oracle/oci-go-sdk/blob/master/LICENSE.txt To be notified when a new version of the Go SDK is released, subscribe to the following feed: https://github.com/oracle/oci-go-sdk/releases.atom Please refer to this link: https://github.com/oracle/oci-go-sdk#help

v24.3.0+incompatible • 4 years ago

github.com/decred/dcrd/database/v2

Package database provides a block and metadata storage database. This package provides a database layer to store and retrieve block data and arbitrary metadata in a simple and efficient manner. The default backend, ffldb, has a strong focus on speed, efficiency, and robustness. It makes use leveldb for the metadata, flat files for block storage, and strict checksums in key areas to ensure data integrity. A quick overview of the features database provides are as follows: The main entry point is the DB interface. It exposes functionality for transactional-based access and storage of metadata and block data. It is obtained via the Create and Open functions which take a database type string that identifies the specific database driver (backend) to use as well as arguments specific to the specified driver. The Namespace interface is an abstraction that provides facilities for obtaining transactions (the Tx interface) that are the basis of all database reads and writes. Unlike some database interfaces that support reading and writing without transactions, this interface requires transactions even when only reading or writing a single key. The Begin function provides an unmanaged transaction while the View and Update functions provide a managed transaction. These are described in more detail below. The Tx interface provides facilities for rolling back or committing changes that took place while the transaction was active. It also provides the root metadata bucket under which all keys, values, and nested buckets are stored. A transaction can either be read-only or read-write and managed or unmanaged. A managed transaction is one where the caller provides a function to execute within the context of the transaction and the commit or rollback is handled automatically depending on whether or not the provided function returns an error. Attempting to manually call Rollback or Commit on the managed transaction will result in a panic. An unmanaged transaction, on the other hand, requires the caller to manually call Commit or Rollback when they are finished with it. Leaving transactions open for long periods of time can have several adverse effects, so it is recommended that managed transactions are used instead. The Bucket interface provides the ability to manipulate key/value pairs and nested buckets as well as iterate through them. The Get, Put, and Delete functions work with key/value pairs, while the Bucket, CreateBucket, CreateBucketIfNotExists, and DeleteBucket functions work with buckets. The ForEach function allows the caller to provide a function to be called with each key/value pair and nested bucket in the current bucket. As discussed above, all of the functions which are used to manipulate key/value pairs and nested buckets exist on the Bucket interface. The root metadata bucket is the upper-most bucket in which data is stored and is created at the same time as the database. Use the Metadata function on the Tx interface to retrieve it. The CreateBucket and CreateBucketIfNotExists functions on the Bucket interface provide the ability to create an arbitrary number of nested buckets. It is a good idea to avoid a lot of buckets with little data in them as it could lead to poor page utilization depending on the specific driver in use. This example demonstrates creating a new database and using a managed read-write transaction to store and retrieve metadata. This example demonstrates creating a new database, using a managed read-write transaction to store a block, and using a managed read-only transaction to fetch the block.

v2.0.3 • last year

github.com/ThalesIgnite/crypto11

Package crypto11 enables access to cryptographic keys from PKCS#11 using Go crypto API. PKCS#11 tokens are accessed via Context objects. Each Context connects to one token. Context objects are created by calling Configure or ConfigureFromFile. In the latter case, the file should contain a JSON representation of a Config. There is support for generating DSA, RSA and ECDSA keys. These keys can be found later using FindKeyPair. All three key types implement the crypto.Signer interface and the RSA keys also implement crypto.Decrypter. RSA keys obtained through FindKeyPair will need a type assertion to be used for decryption. Assert either crypto.Decrypter or SignerDecrypter, as you prefer. Symmetric keys can also be generated. These are found later using FindKey. See the documentation for SecretKey for further information. Note that PKCS#11 session handles must not be used concurrently from multiple threads. Consumers of the Signer interface know nothing of this and expect to be able to sign from multiple threads without constraint. We address this as follows. 1. When a Context is created, a session is created and the user is logged in. This session remains open until the Context is closed, to ensure all object handles remain valid and to avoid repeatedly calling C_Login. 2. The Context also maintains a pool of read-write sessions. The pool expands dynamically as needed, but never beyond the maximum number of r/w sessions supported by the token (as reported by C_GetInfo). If other applications are using the token, a lower limit should be set in the Config. 3. Each operation transiently takes a session from the pool. They have exclusive use of the session, meeting PKCS#11's concurrency requirements. Sessions are returned to the pool afterwards and may be re-used. Behaviour of the pool can be tweaked via Config fields: - PoolWaitTimeout controls how long an operation can block waiting on a session from the pool. A zero value means there is no limit. Timeouts occur if the pool is fully used and additional operations are requested. - MaxSessions sets an upper bound on the number of sessions. If this value is zero, a default maximum is used (see DefaultMaxSessions). In every case the maximum supported sessions as reported by the token is obeyed. The PKCS1v15DecryptOptions SessionKeyLen field is not implemented and an error is returned if it is nonzero. The reason for this is that it is not possible for crypto11 to guarantee the constant-time behavior in the specification. See https://github.com/thalesignite/crypto11/issues/5 for further discussion. Symmetric crypto support via cipher.Block is very slow. You can use the BlockModeCloser API but you must call the Close() interface (not found in cipher.BlockMode). See https://github.com/ThalesIgnite/crypto11/issues/6 for further discussion.

v1.2.5 • 3 years ago

github.com/firecracker-microvm/firecracker-go-sdk

Copyright Amazon.com, Inc. or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. Licensed under the Apache License, Version 2.0 (the "License"). You may not use this file except in compliance with the License. A copy of the License is located at or in the "license" file accompanying this file. This file is distributed on an "AS IS" BASIS, WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either express or implied. See the License for the specific language governing permissions and limitations under the License. Package firecracker provides a library to interact with the Firecracker API. Firecracker is an open-source virtualization technology that is purpose-built for creating and managing secure, multi-tenant containers and functions-based services. See https://firecracker-microvm.github.io/ for more details. This library requires Go 1.11 and can be used with Go modules. BUG(aws): There are some Firecracker features that are not yet supported by the SDK. These are tracked as GitHub issues with the firecracker-feature label: https://github.com/firecracker-microvm/firecracker-go-sdk/issues?q=is%3Aissue+is%3Aopen+label%3Afirecracker-feature This library is licensed under the Apache 2.0 License. Copyright Amazon.com, Inc. or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. Licensed under the Apache License, Version 2.0 (the "License"). You may not use this file except in compliance with the License. A copy of the License is located at or in the "license" file accompanying this file. This file is distributed on an "AS IS" BASIS, WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either express or implied. See the License for the specific language governing permissions and limitations under the License. Copyright Amazon.com, Inc. or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. Licensed under the Apache License, Version 2.0 (the "License"). You may not use this file except in compliance with the License. A copy of the License is located at or in the "license" file accompanying this file. This file is distributed on an "AS IS" BASIS, WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either express or implied. See the License for the specific language governing permissions and limitations under the License. Copyright Amazon.com, Inc. or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. Licensed under the Apache License, Version 2.0 (the "License"). You may not use this file except in compliance with the License. A copy of the License is located at or in the "license" file accompanying this file. This file is distributed on an "AS IS" BASIS, WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either express or implied. See the License for the specific language governing permissions and limitations under the License.

v1.0.0 • 2 years ago

github.com/zalando/skipper

Package skipper provides an HTTP routing library with flexible configuration as well as a runtime update of the routing rules. Skipper works as an HTTP reverse proxy that is responsible for mapping incoming requests to multiple HTTP backend services, based on routes that are selected by the request attributes. At the same time, both the requests and the responses can be augmented by a filter chain that is specifically defined for each route. Optionally, it can provide circuit breaker mechanism individually for each backend host. Skipper can load and update the route definitions from multiple data sources without being restarted. It provides a default executable command with a few built-in filters, however, its primary use case is to be extended with custom filters, predicates or data sources. For further information read 'Extending Skipper'. Skipper took the core design and inspiration from Vulcand: https://github.com/mailgun/vulcand. Skipper is 'go get' compatible. If needed, create a 'go workspace' first: Get the Skipper packages: Create a file with a route: Optionally, verify the syntax of the file: Start Skipper and make an HTTP request: The core of Skipper's request processing is implemented by a reverse proxy in the 'proxy' package. The proxy receives the incoming request, forwards it to the routing engine in order to receive the most specific matching route. When a route matches, the request is forwarded to all filters defined by it. The filters can modify the request or execute any kind of program logic. Once the request has been processed by all the filters, it is forwarded to the backend endpoint of the route. The response from the backend goes once again through all the filters in reverse order. Finally, it is mapped as the response of the original incoming request. Besides the default proxying mechanism, it is possible to define routes without a real network backend endpoint. One of these cases is called a 'shunt' backend, in which case one of the filters needs to handle the request providing its own response (e.g. the 'static' filter). Actually, filters themselves can instruct the request flow to shunt by calling the Serve(*http.Response) method of the filter context. Another case of a route without a network backend is the 'loopback'. A loopback route can be used to match a request, modified by filters, against the lookup tree with different conditions and then execute a different route. One example scenario can be to use a single route as an entry point to execute some calculation to get an A/B testing decision and then matching the updated request metadata for the actual destination route. This way the calculation can be executed for only those requests that don't contain information about a previously calculated decision. For further details, see the 'proxy' and 'filters' package documentation. Finding a request's route happens by matching the request attributes to the conditions in the route's definitions. Such definitions may have the following conditions: - method - path (optionally with wildcards) - path regular expressions - host regular expressions - headers - header regular expressions It is also possible to create custom predicates with any other matching criteria. The relation between the conditions in a route definition is 'and', meaning, that a request must fulfill each condition to match a route. For further details, see the 'routing' package documentation. Filters are applied in order of definition to the request and in reverse order to the response. They are used to modify request and response attributes, such as headers, or execute background tasks, like logging. Some filters may handle the requests without proxying them to service backends. Filters, depending on their implementation, may accept/require parameters, that are set specifically to the route. For further details, see the 'filters' package documentation. Each route has one of the following backends: HTTP endpoint, shunt, loopback or dynamic. Backend endpoints can be any HTTP service. They are specified by their network address, including the protocol scheme, the domain name or the IP address, and optionally the port number: e.g. "https://www.example.org:4242". (The path and query are sent from the original request, or set by filters.) A shunt route means that Skipper handles the request alone and doesn't make requests to a backend service. In this case, it is the responsibility of one of the filters to generate the response. A loopback route executes the routing mechanism on current state of the request from the start, including the route lookup. This way it serves as a form of an internal redirect. A dynamic route means that the final target will be defined in a filter. One of the filters in the chain must set the target backend url explicitly. Route definitions consist of the following: - request matching conditions (predicates) - filter chain (optional) - backend The eskip package implements the in-memory and text representations of route definitions, including a parser. (Note to contributors: in order to stay compatible with 'go get', the generated part of the parser is stored in the repository. When changing the grammar, 'go generate' needs to be executed explicitly to update the parser.) For further details, see the 'eskip' package documentation Skipper has filter implementations of basic auth and OAuth2. It can be integrated with tokeninfo based OAuth2 providers. For details, see: https://godoc.org/github.com/zalando/skipper/filters/auth. Skipper's route definitions of Skipper are loaded from one or more data sources. It can receive incremental updates from those data sources at runtime. It provides three different data clients: - Kubernetes: Skipper can be used as part of a Kubernetes Ingress Controller implementation together with https://github.com/zalando-incubator/kube-ingress-aws-controller . In this scenario, Skipper uses the Kubernetes API's Ingress extensions as a source for routing. For a complete deployment example, see more details in: https://github.com/zalando-incubator/kubernetes-on-aws/ . - Innkeeper: the Innkeeper service implements a storage for large sets of Skipper routes, with an HTTP+JSON API, OAuth2 authentication and role management. See the 'innkeeper' package and https://github.com/zalando/innkeeper. - etcd: Skipper can load routes and receive updates from etcd clusters (https://github.com/coreos/etcd). See the 'etcd' package. - static file: package eskipfile implements a simple data client, which can load route definitions from a static file in eskip format. Currently, it loads the routes on startup. It doesn't support runtime updates. Skipper can use additional data sources, provided by extensions. Sources must implement the DataClient interface in the routing package. Skipper provides circuit breakers, configured either globally, based on backend hosts or based on individual routes. It supports two types of circuit breaker behavior: open on N consecutive failures, or open on N failures out of M requests. For details, see: https://godoc.org/github.com/zalando/skipper/circuit. Skipper can be started with the default executable command 'skipper', or as a library built into an application. The easiest way to start Skipper as a library is to execute the 'Run' function of the current, root package. Each option accepted by the 'Run' function is wired in the default executable as well, as a command line flag. E.g. EtcdUrls becomes -etcd-urls as a comma separated list. For command line help, enter: An additional utility, eskip, can be used to verify, print, update and delete routes from/to files or etcd (Innkeeper on the roadmap). See the cmd/eskip command package, and/or enter in the command line: Skipper doesn't use dynamically loaded plugins, however, it can be used as a library, and it can be extended with custom predicates, filters and/or custom data sources. To create a custom predicate, one needs to implement the PredicateSpec interface in the routing package. Instances of the PredicateSpec are used internally by the routing package to create the actual Predicate objects as referenced in eskip routes, with concrete arguments. Example, randompredicate.go: In the above example, a custom predicate is created, that can be referenced in eskip definitions with the name 'Random': To create a custom filter we need to implement the Spec interface of the filters package. 'Spec' is the specification of a filter, and it is used to create concrete filter instances, while the raw route definitions are processed. Example, hellofilter.go: The above example creates a filter specification, and in the routes where they are included, the filter instances will set the 'X-Hello' header for each and every response. The name of the filter is 'hello', and in a route definition it is referenced as: The easiest way to create a custom Skipper variant is to implement the required filters (as in the example above) by importing the Skipper package, and starting it with the 'Run' command. Example, hello.go: A file containing the routes, routes.eskip: Start the custom router: The 'Run' function in the root Skipper package starts its own listener but it doesn't provide the best composability. The proxy package, however, provides a standard http.Handler, so it is possible to use it in a more complex solution as a building block for routing. Skipper provides detailed logging of failures, and access logs in Apache log format. Skipper also collects detailed performance metrics, and exposes them on a separate listener endpoint for pulling snapshots. For details, see the 'logging' and 'metrics' packages documentation. The router's performance depends on the environment and on the used filters. Under ideal circumstances, and without filters, the biggest time factor is the route lookup. Skipper is able to scale to thousands of routes with logarithmic performance degradation. However, this comes at the cost of increased memory consumption, due to storing the whole lookup tree in a single structure. Benchmarks for the tree lookup can be run by: In case more aggressive scale is needed, it is possible to setup Skipper in a cascade model, with multiple Skipper instances for specific route segments.

v0.19.30 • 10 months ago

github.com/decred/dcrd/database/v3

Package database provides a block and metadata storage database. This package provides a database layer to store and retrieve block data and arbitrary metadata in a simple and efficient manner. The default backend, ffldb, has a strong focus on speed, efficiency, and robustness. It makes use leveldb for the metadata, flat files for block storage, and strict checksums in key areas to ensure data integrity. A quick overview of the features database provides are as follows: The main entry point is the DB interface. It exposes functionality for transactional-based access and storage of metadata and block data. It is obtained via the Create and Open functions which take a database type string that identifies the specific database driver (backend) to use as well as arguments specific to the specified driver. The Namespace interface is an abstraction that provides facilities for obtaining transactions (the Tx interface) that are the basis of all database reads and writes. Unlike some database interfaces that support reading and writing without transactions, this interface requires transactions even when only reading or writing a single key. The Begin function provides an unmanaged transaction while the View and Update functions provide a managed transaction. These are described in more detail below. The Tx interface provides facilities for rolling back or committing changes that took place while the transaction was active. It also provides the root metadata bucket under which all keys, values, and nested buckets are stored. A transaction can either be read-only or read-write and managed or unmanaged. A managed transaction is one where the caller provides a function to execute within the context of the transaction and the commit or rollback is handled automatically depending on whether or not the provided function returns an error. Attempting to manually call Rollback or Commit on the managed transaction will result in a panic. An unmanaged transaction, on the other hand, requires the caller to manually call Commit or Rollback when they are finished with it. Leaving transactions open for long periods of time can have several adverse effects, so it is recommended that managed transactions are used instead. The Bucket interface provides the ability to manipulate key/value pairs and nested buckets as well as iterate through them. The Get, Put, and Delete functions work with key/value pairs, while the Bucket, CreateBucket, CreateBucketIfNotExists, and DeleteBucket functions work with buckets. The ForEach function allows the caller to provide a function to be called with each key/value pair and nested bucket in the current bucket. As discussed above, all of the functions which are used to manipulate key/value pairs and nested buckets exist on the Bucket interface. The root metadata bucket is the upper-most bucket in which data is stored and is created at the same time as the database. Use the Metadata function on the Tx interface to retrieve it. The CreateBucket and CreateBucketIfNotExists functions on the Bucket interface provide the ability to create an arbitrary number of nested buckets. It is a good idea to avoid a lot of buckets with little data in them as it could lead to poor page utilization depending on the specific driver in use. This example demonstrates creating a new database and using a managed read-write transaction to store and retrieve metadata. This example demonstrates creating a new database, using a managed read-write transaction to store a block, and using a managed read-only transaction to fetch the block.

v3.0.2 • 6 months ago

github.com/mna/pigeon

Command pigeon generates parsers in Go from a PEG grammar. From Wikipedia [0]: Its features and syntax are inspired by the PEG.js project [1], while the implementation is loosely based on [2]. Formal presentation of the PEG theory by Bryan Ford is also an important reference [3]. An introductory blog post can be found at [4]. The pigeon tool must be called with PEG input as defined by the accepted PEG syntax below. The grammar may be provided by a file or read from stdin. The generated parser is written to stdout by default. The following options can be specified: If the code blocks in the grammar (see below, section "Code block") are golint- and go vet-compliant, then the resulting generated code will also be golint- and go vet-compliant. The generated code doesn't use any third-party dependency unless code blocks in the grammar require such a dependency. The accepted syntax for the grammar is formally defined in the grammar/pigeon.peg file, using the PEG syntax. What follows is an informal description of this syntax. Identifiers, whitespace, comments and literals follow the same notation as the Go language, as defined in the language specification (http://golang.org/ref/spec#Source_code_representation): The grammar must be Unicode text encoded in UTF-8. New lines are identified by the \n character (U+000A). Space (U+0020), horizontal tabs (U+0009) and carriage returns (U+000D) are considered whitespace and are ignored except to separate tokens. A PEG grammar consists of a set of rules. A rule is an identifier followed by a rule definition operator and an expression. An optional display name - a string literal used in error messages instead of the rule identifier - can be specified after the rule identifier. E.g.: The rule definition operator can be any one of those: A rule is defined by an expression. The following sections describe the various expression types. Expressions can be grouped by using parentheses, and a rule can be referenced by its identifier in place of an expression. The choice expression is a list of expressions that will be tested in the order they are defined. The first one that matches will be used. Expressions are separated by the forward slash character "/". E.g.: Because the first match is used, it is important to think about the order of expressions. For example, in this rule, "<=" would never be used because the "<" expression comes first: The sequence expression is a list of expressions that must all match in that same order for the sequence expression to be considered a match. Expressions are separated by whitespace. E.g.: A labeled expression consists of an identifier followed by a colon ":" and an expression. A labeled expression introduces a variable named with the label that can be referenced in the code blocks in the same scope. The variable will have the value of the expression that follows the colon. E.g.: The variable is typed as an empty interface, and the underlying type depends on the following: For terminals (character and string literals, character classes and the any matcher), the value is []byte. E.g.: For predicates (& and !), the value is always nil. E.g.: For a sequence, the value is a slice of empty interfaces, one for each expression value in the sequence. The underlying types of each value in the slice follow the same rules described here, recursively. E.g.: For a repetition (+ and *), the value is a slice of empty interfaces, one for each repetition. The underlying types of each value in the slice follow the same rules described here, recursively. E.g.: For a choice expression, the value is that of the matching choice. E.g.: For the optional expression (?), the value is nil or the value of the expression. E.g.: Of course, the type of the value can be anything once an action code block is used. E.g.: An expression prefixed with the ampersand "&" is the "and" predicate expression: it is considered a match if the following expression is a match, but it does not consume any input. An expression prefixed with the exclamation point "!" is the "not" predicate expression: it is considered a match if the following expression is not a match, but it does not consume any input. E.g.: The expression following the & and ! operators can be a code block. In that case, the code block must return a bool and an error. The operator's semantic is the same, & is a match if the code block returns true, ! is a match if the code block returns false. The code block has access to any labeled value defined in its scope. E.g.: An expression followed by "*", "?" or "+" is a match if the expression occurs zero or more times ("*"), zero or one time "?" or one or more times ("+") respectively. The match is greedy, it will match as many times as possible. E.g. A literal matcher tries to match the input against a single character or a string literal. The literal may be a single-quoted single character, a double-quoted string or a backtick-quoted raw string. The same rules as in Go apply regarding the allowed characters and escapes. The literal may be followed by a lowercase "i" (outside the ending quote) to indicate that the match is case-insensitive. E.g.: A character class matcher tries to match the input against a class of characters inside square brackets "[...]". Inside the brackets, characters represent themselves and the same escapes as in string literals are available, except that the single- and double-quote escape is not valid, instead the closing square bracket "]" must be escaped to be used. Character ranges can be specified using the "[a-z]" notation. Unicode classes can be specified using the "[\pL]" notation, where L is a single-letter Unicode class of characters, or using the "[\p{Class}]" notation where Class is a valid Unicode class (e.g. "Latin"). As for string literals, a lowercase "i" may follow the matcher (outside the ending square bracket) to indicate that the match is case-insensitive. A "^" as first character inside the square brackets indicates that the match is inverted (it is a match if the input does not match the character class matcher). E.g.: The any matcher is represented by the dot ".". It matches any character except the end of file, thus the "!." expression is used to indicate "match the end of file". E.g.: Code blocks can be added to generate custom Go code. There are three kinds of code blocks: the initializer, the action and the predicate. All code blocks appear inside curly braces "{...}". The initializer must appear first in the grammar, before any rule. It is copied as-is (minus the wrapping curly braces) at the top of the generated parser. It may contain function declarations, types, variables, etc. just like any Go file. Every symbol declared here will be available to all other code blocks. Although the initializer is optional in a valid grammar, it is usually required to generate a valid Go source code file (for the package clause). E.g.: Action code blocks are code blocks declared after an expression in a rule. Those code blocks are turned into a method on the "*current" type in the generated source code. The method receives any labeled expression's value as argument (as any) and must return two values, the first being the value of the expression (an any), and the second an error. If a non-nil error is returned, it is added to the list of errors that the parser will return. E.g.: Predicate code blocks are code blocks declared immediately after the and "&" or the not "!" operators. Like action code blocks, predicate code blocks are turned into a method on the "*current" type in the generated source code. The method receives any labeled expression's value as argument (as any) and must return two opt, the first being a bool and the second an error. If a non-nil error is returned, it is added to the list of errors that the parser will return. E.g.: State change code blocks are code blocks starting with "#". In contrast to action and predicate code blocks, state change code blocks are allowed to modify values in the global "state" store (see below). State change code blocks are turned into a method on the "*current" type in the generated source code. The method is passed any labeled expression's value as an argument (of type any) and must return a value of type error. If a non-nil error is returned, it is added to the list of errors that the parser will return, note that the parser does NOT backtrack if a non-nil error is returned. E.g: The "*current" type is a struct that provides four useful fields that can be accessed in action, state change, and predicate code blocks: "pos", "text", "state" and "globalStore". The "pos" field indicates the current position of the parser in the source input. It is itself a struct with three fields: "line", "col" and "offset". Line is a 1-based line number, col is a 1-based column number that counts runes from the start of the line, and offset is a 0-based byte offset. The "text" field is the slice of bytes of the current match. It is empty in a predicate code block. The "state" field is a global store, with backtrack support, of type "map[string]any". The values in the store are tied to the parser's backtracking, in particular if a rule fails to match then all updates to the state that occurred in the process of matching the rule are rolled back. For a key-value store that is not tied to the parser's backtracking, see the "globalStore". The values in the "state" store are available for read access in action and predicate code blocks, any changes made to the "state" store will be reverted once the action or predicate code block is finished running. To update values in the "state" use state change code blocks ("#{}"). IMPORTANT: The "globalStore" field is a global store of type "map[string]any", which allows to store arbitrary values, which are available in action and predicate code blocks for read as well as write access. It is important to notice, that the global store is completely independent from the backtrack mechanism of PEG and is therefore not set back to its old state during backtrack. The initialization of the global store may be achieved by using the GlobalStore function (http://godoc.org/github.com/mna/pigeon/test/predicates#GlobalStore). Be aware, that all keys starting with "_pigeon" are reserved for internal use of pigeon and should not be used nor modified. Those keys are treated as internal implementation details and therefore there are no guarantees given in regards of API stability. With options -support-left-recursion pigeon supports left recursion. E.g.: Supports indirect recursion: The implementation is based on the [Left-recursive PEG Grammars][9] article that links to [Left Recursion in Parsing Expression Grammars][10] and [Packrat Parsers Can Support Left Recursion][11] papers. References: pigeon supports an extension of the classical PEG syntax called failure labels, proposed by Maidl et al. in their paper "Error Reporting in Parsing Expression Grammars" [7]. The used syntax for the introduced expressions is borrowed from their lpeglabel [8] implementation. This extension allows to signal different kinds of errors and to specify, which recovery pattern should handle a given label. With labeled failures it is possible to distinguish between an ordinary failure and an error. Usually, an ordinary failure is produced when the matching of a character fails, and this failure is caught by ordered choice. An error (a non-ordinary failure), by its turn, is produced by the throw operator and may be caught by the recovery operator. In pigeon, the recovery expression consists of the regular expression, the recovery expression and a set of labels to be matched. First, the regular expression is tried. If this fails with one of the provided labels, the recovery expression is tried. If this fails as well, the error is propagated. E.g.: To signal a failure condition, the throw expression is used. E.g.: For concrete examples, how to use throw and recover, have a look at the examples "labeled_failures" and "thrownrecover" in the "test" folder. The implementation of the throw and recover operators work as follows: The failure recover expression adds the recover expression for every failure label to the recovery stack and runs the regular expression. The throw expression checks the recovery stack in reversed order for the provided failure label. If the label is found, the respective recovery expression is run. If this expression is successful, the parser continues the processing of the input. If the recovery expression is not successful, the parsing fails and the parser starts to backtrack. If throw and recover expressions are used together with global state, it is the responsibility of the author of the grammar to reset the global state to a valid state during the recovery operation. The parser generated by pigeon exports a few symbols so that it can be used as a package with public functions to parse input text. The exported API is: See the godoc page of the generated parser for the test/predicates grammar for an example documentation page of the exported API: http://godoc.org/github.com/mna/pigeon/test/predicates. Like the grammar used to generate the parser, the input text must be UTF-8-encoded Unicode. The start rule of the parser is the first rule in the PEG grammar used to generate the parser. A call to any of the Parse* functions returns the value generated by executing the grammar on the provided input text, and an optional error. Typically, the grammar should generate some kind of abstract syntax tree (AST), but for simple grammars it may evaluate the result immediately, such as in the examples/calculator example. There are no constraints imposed on the author of the grammar, it can return whatever is needed. When the parser returns a non-nil error, the error is always of type errList, which is defined as a slice of errors ([]error). Each error in the list is of type *parserError. This is a struct that has an "Inner" field that can be used to access the original error. So if a code block returns some well-known error like: The original error can be accessed this way: By default the parser will continue after an error is returned and will cumulate all errors found during parsing. If the grammar reaches a point where it shouldn't continue, a panic statement can be used to terminate parsing. The panic will be caught at the top-level of the Parse* call and will be converted into a *parserError like any error, and an errList will still be returned to the caller. The divide by zero error in the examples/calculator grammar leverages this feature (no special code is needed to handle division by zero, if it happens, the runtime panics and it is recovered and returned as a parsing error). Providing good error reporting in a parser is not a trivial task. Part of it is provided by the pigeon tool, by offering features such as filename, position, expected literals and rule name in the error message, but an important part of good error reporting needs to be done by the grammar author. For example, many programming languages use double-quotes for string literals. Usually, if the opening quote is found, the closing quote is expected, and if none is found, there won't be any other rule that will match, there's no need to backtrack and try other choices, an error should be added to the list and the match should be consumed. In order to do this, the grammar can look something like this: This is just one example, but it illustrates the idea that error reporting needs to be thought out when designing the grammar. Because the above mentioned error types (errList and parserError) are not exported, additional steps have to be taken, ff the generated parser is used as library package in other packages (e.g. if the same parser is used in multiple command line tools). One possible implementation for exported errors (based on interfaces) and customized error reporting (caret style formatting of the position, where the parsing failed) is available in the json example and its command line tool: http://godoc.org/github.com/mna/pigeon/examples/json Generated parsers have user-provided code mixed with pigeon code in the same package, so there is no package boundary in the resulting code to prevent access to unexported symbols. What is meant to be implementation details in pigeon is also available to user code - which doesn't mean it should be used. For this reason, it is important to precisely define what is intended to be the supported API of pigeon, the parts that will be stable in future versions. The "stability" of the version 1.0 API attempts to make a similar guarantee as the Go 1 compatibility [5]. The following lists what part of the current pigeon code falls under that guarantee (features may be added in the future): The pigeon command-line flags and arguments: those will not be removed and will maintain the same semantics. The explicitly exported API generated by pigeon. See [6] for the documentation of this API on a generated parser. The PEG syntax, as documented above. The code blocks (except the initializer) will always be generated as methods on the *current type, and this type is guaranteed to have the fields pos (type position) and text (type []byte). There are no guarantees on other fields and methods of this type. The position type will always have the fields line, col and offset, all defined as int. There are no guarantees on other fields and methods of this type. The type of the error value returned by the Parse* functions, when not nil, will always be errList defined as a []error. There are no guarantees on methods of this type, other than the fact it implements the error interface. Individual errors in the errList will always be of type *parserError, and this type is guaranteed to have an Inner field that contains the original error value. There are no guarantees on other fields and methods of this type. The above guarantee is given to the version 1.0 (https://github.com/mna/pigeon/releases/tag/v1.0.0) of pigeon, which has entered maintenance mode (bug fixes only). The current master branch includes the development toward a future version 2.0, which intends to further improve pigeon. While the given API stability should be maintained as far as it makes sense, breaking changes may be necessary to be able to improve pigeon. The new version 2.0 API has not yet stabilized and therefore changes to the API may occur at any time. References:

v1.3.0 • 2 months ago

github.com/jung-kurt/gofpdf/v2

Package gofpdf implements a PDF document generator with high level support for text, drawing and images. - UTF-8 support - Choice of measurement unit, page format and margins - Page header and footer management - Automatic page breaks, line breaks, and text justification - Inclusion of JPEG, PNG, GIF, TIFF and basic path-only SVG images - Colors, gradients and alpha channel transparency - Outline bookmarks - Internal and external links - TrueType, Type1 and encoding support - Page compression - Lines, Bézier curves, arcs, and ellipses - Rotation, scaling, skewing, translation, and mirroring - Clipping - Document protection - Layers - Templates - Barcodes - Charting facility - Import PDFs as templates gofpdf has no dependencies other than the Go standard library. All tests pass on Linux, Mac and Windows platforms. gofpdf supports UTF-8 TrueType fonts and “right-to-left” languages. Note that Chinese, Japanese, and Korean characters may not be included in many general purpose fonts. For these languages, a specialized font (for example, NotoSansSC for simplified Chinese) can be used. Also, support is provided to automatically translate UTF-8 runes to code page encodings for languages that have fewer than 256 glyphs. This repository will not be maintained, at least for some unknown duration. But it is hoped that gofpdf has a bright future in the open source world. Due to Go’s promise of compatibility, gofpdf should continue to function without modification for a longer time than would be the case with many other languages. Forks should be based on the last viable commit. Tools such as active-forks can be used to select a fork that looks promising for your needs. If a particular fork looks like it has taken the lead in attracting followers, this README will be updated to point people in that direction. The efforts of all contributors to this project have been deeply appreciated. Best wishes to all of you. If you currently use the $GOPATH scheme, install the package with the following command. To test the installation, run The following Go code generates a simple PDF file. See the functions in the fpdf_test.go file (shown as examples in this documentation) for more advanced PDF examples. If an error occurs in an Fpdf method, an internal error field is set. After this occurs, Fpdf method calls typically return without performing any operations and the error state is retained. This error management scheme facilitates PDF generation since individual method calls do not need to be examined for failure; it is generally sufficient to wait until after Output() is called. For the same reason, if an error occurs in the calling application during PDF generation, it may be desirable for the application to transfer the error to the Fpdf instance by calling the SetError() method or the SetErrorf() method. At any time during the life cycle of the Fpdf instance, the error state can be determined with a call to Ok() or Err(). The error itself can be retrieved with a call to Error(). This package is a relatively straightforward translation from the original FPDF library written in PHP (despite the caveat in the introduction to Effective Go). The API names have been retained even though the Go idiom would suggest otherwise (for example, pdf.GetX() is used rather than simply pdf.X()). The similarity of the two libraries makes the original FPDF website a good source of information. It includes a forum and FAQ. However, some internal changes have been made. Page content is built up using buffers (of type bytes.Buffer) rather than repeated string concatenation. Errors are handled as explained above rather than panicking. Output is generated through an interface of type io.Writer or io.WriteCloser. A number of the original PHP methods behave differently based on the type of the arguments that are passed to them; in these cases additional methods have been exported to provide similar functionality. Font definition files are produced in JSON rather than PHP. A side effect of running go test ./... is the production of a number of example PDFs. These can be found in the gofpdf/pdf directory after the tests complete. Please note that these examples run in the context of a test. In order run an example as a standalone application, you’ll need to examine fpdf_test.go for some helper routines, for example exampleFilename() and summary(). Example PDFs can be compared with reference copies in order to verify that they have been generated as expected. This comparison will be performed if a PDF with the same name as the example PDF is placed in the gofpdf/pdf/reference directory and if the third argument to ComparePDFFiles() in internal/example/example.go is true. (By default it is false.) The routine that summarizes an example will look for this file and, if found, will call ComparePDFFiles() to check the example PDF for equality with its reference PDF. If differences exist between the two files they will be printed to standard output and the test will fail. If the reference file is missing, the comparison is considered to succeed. In order to successfully compare two PDFs, the placement of internal resources must be consistent and the internal creation timestamps must be the same. To do this, the methods SetCatalogSort() and SetCreationDate() need to be called for both files. This is done automatically for all examples. Nothing special is required to use the standard PDF fonts (courier, helvetica, times, zapfdingbats) in your documents other than calling SetFont(). You should use AddUTF8Font() or AddUTF8FontFromBytes() to add a TrueType UTF-8 encoded font. Use RTL() and LTR() methods switch between “right-to-left” and “left-to-right” mode. In order to use a different non-UTF-8 TrueType or Type1 font, you will need to generate a font definition file and, if the font will be embedded into PDFs, a compressed version of the font file. This is done by calling the MakeFont function or using the included makefont command line utility. To create the utility, cd into the makefont subdirectory and run “go build”. This will produce a standalone executable named makefont. Select the appropriate encoding file from the font subdirectory and run the command as in the following example. In your PDF generation code, call AddFont() to load the font and, as with the standard fonts, SetFont() to begin using it. Most examples, including the package example, demonstrate this method. Good sources of free, open-source fonts include Google Fonts and DejaVu Fonts. The draw2d package is a two dimensional vector graphics library that can generate output in different forms. It uses gofpdf for its document production mode. gofpdf is a global community effort and you are invited to make it even better. If you have implemented a new feature or corrected a problem, please consider contributing your change to the project. A contribution that does not directly pertain to the core functionality of gofpdf should be placed in its own directory directly beneath the contrib directory. Here are guidelines for making submissions. Your change should - be compatible with the MIT License - be properly documented - be formatted with go fmt - include an example in fpdf_test.go if appropriate - conform to the standards of golint and go vet, that is, golint . and go vet . should not generate any warnings - not diminish test coverage Pull requests are the preferred means of accepting your changes. gofpdf is released under the MIT License. It is copyrighted by Kurt Jung and the contributors acknowledged below. This package’s code and documentation are closely derived from the FPDF library created by Olivier Plathey, and a number of font and image resources are copied directly from it. Bruno Michel has provided valuable assistance with the code. Drawing support is adapted from the FPDF geometric figures script by David Hernández Sanz. Transparency support is adapted from the FPDF transparency script by Martin Hall-May. Support for gradients and clipping is adapted from FPDF scripts by Andreas Würmser. Support for outline bookmarks is adapted from Olivier Plathey by Manuel Cornes. Layer support is adapted from Olivier Plathey. Support for transformations is adapted from the FPDF transformation script by Moritz Wagner and Andreas Würmser. PDF protection is adapted from the work of Klemen Vodopivec for the FPDF product. Lawrence Kesteloot provided code to allow an image’s extent to be determined prior to placement. Support for vertical alignment within a cell was provided by Stefan Schroeder. Ivan Daniluk generalized the font and image loading code to use the Reader interface while maintaining backward compatibility. Anthony Starks provided code for the Polygon function. Robert Lillack provided the Beziergon function and corrected some naming issues with the internal curve function. Claudio Felber provided implementations for dashed line drawing and generalized font loading. Stani Michiels provided support for multi-segment path drawing with smooth line joins, line join styles, enhanced fill modes, and has helped greatly with package presentation and tests. Templating is adapted by Marcus Downing from the FPDF_Tpl library created by Jan Slabon and Setasign. Jelmer Snoeck contributed packages that generate a variety of barcodes and help with registering images on the web. Jelmer Snoek and Guillermo Pascual augmented the basic HTML functionality with aligned text. Kent Quirk implemented backwards-compatible support for reading DPI from images that support it, and for setting DPI manually and then having it properly taken into account when calculating image size. Paulo Coutinho provided support for static embedded fonts. Dan Meyers added support for embedded JavaScript. David Fish added a generic alias-replacement function to enable, among other things, table of contents functionality. Andy Bakun identified and corrected a problem in which the internal catalogs were not sorted stably. Paul Montag added encoding and decoding functionality for templates, including images that are embedded in templates; this allows templates to be stored independently of gofpdf. Paul also added support for page boxes used in printing PDF documents. Wojciech Matusiak added supported for word spacing. Artem Korotkiy added support of UTF-8 fonts. Dave Barnes added support for imported objects and templates. Brigham Thompson added support for rounded rectangles. Joe Westcott added underline functionality and optimized image storage. Benoit KUGLER contributed support for rectangles with corners of unequal radius, modification times, and for file attachments and annotations. - Remove all legacy code page font support; use UTF-8 exclusively - Improve test coverage as reported by the coverage tool. Example demonstrates the generation of a simple PDF document. Note that since only core fonts are used (in this case Arial, a synonym for Helvetica), an empty string can be specified for the font directory in the call to New(). Note also that the example.Filename() and example.Summary() functions belong to a separate, internal package and are not part of the gofpdf library. If an error occurs at some point during the construction of the document, subsequent method calls exit immediately and the error is finally retrieved with the output call where it can be handled by the application.

v2.17.3 • 3 years ago

github.com/fraugster/parquet-go

Package goparquet is an implementation of the parquet file format in Go. It provides functionality to both read and write parquet files, as well as high-level functionality to manage the data schema of parquet files, to directly write Go objects to parquet files using automatic or custom marshalling and to read records from parquet files into Go objects using automatic or custom marshalling. parquet is a file format to store nested data structures in a flat columnar format. By storing in a column-oriented way, it allows for efficient reading of individual columns without having to read and decode complete rows. This allows for efficient reading and faster processing when using the file format in conjunction with distributed data processing frameworks like Apache Hadoop or distributed SQL query engines like Presto and AWS Athena. This particular implementation is divided into several packages. The top-level package that you're currently viewing is the low-level implementation of the file format. It is accompanied by the sub-packages parquetschema and floor. parquetschema provides functionality to parse textual schema definitions as well as the data types to manually or programmatically construct schema definitions by other means that are open to the user. The textual schema definition format is based on the barely documented schema definition format that is implemented in the parquet Java implementation. See the parquetschema sub-package for further documentation on how to use this package and the grammar of the schema definition format as well as examples. floor is a high-level wrapper around the low-level package. It provides functionality to open parquet files to read from them or to write to them. When reading from parquet files, floor takes care of automatically unmarshal the low-level data into the user-provided Go object. When writing to parquet files, user-provided Go objects are first marshalled to a low-level data structure that is then written to the parquet file. These mechanisms allow to directly read and write Go objects without having to deal with the details of the low-level parquet format. Alternatively, marshalling and unmarshalling can be implemented in a custom manner, giving the user maximum flexibility in case of disparities between the parquet schema definition and the actual Go data structure. For more information, please refer to the floor sub-package's documentation. To aid in working with parquet files, this package also provides a commandline tool named "parquet-tool" that allows you to inspect a parquet file's schema, meta data, row count and content as well as to merge and split parquet files. When operating with parquet files, most users should be able to cover their regular use cases of reading and writing files using just the high-level floor package as well as the parquetschema package. Only if a user has more special requirements in how to work with the parquet files, it is advisable to use this low-level package. To write to a parquet file, the type provided by this package is the FileWriter. Create a new *FileWriter object using the NewFileWriter function. You have a number of options available with which you can influence the FileWriter's behaviour. You can use these options to e.g. set meta data, the compression algorithm to use, the schema definition to use, or whether the data should be written in the V2 format. If you didn't set a schema definition, you then need to manually create columns using the functions NewDataColumn, NewListColumn and NewMapColumn, and then add them to the FileWriter by using the AddColumn method. To further structure your data into groups, use AddGroup to create groups. When you add columns to groups, you need to provide the full column name using dotted notation (e.g. "groupname.fieldname") to AddColumn. Using the AddData method, you can then add records. The provided data is of type map[string]interface{}. This data can be nested: to provide data for a repeated field, the data type to use for the map value is []interface{}. When the provided data is a group, the data type for the group itself again needs to be map[string]interface{}. The data within a parquet file is divided into row groups of a certain size. You can either set the desired row group size as a FileWriterOption, or you can manually check the estimated data size of the current row group using the CurrentRowGroupSize method, and use FlushRowGroup to write the data to disk and start a new row group. Please note that CurrentRowGroupSize only estimates the _uncompressed_ data size. If you've enabled compression, it is impossible to predict the compressed data size, so the actual row groups written to disk may be a lot smaller than uncompressed, depending on how efficiently your data can be compressed. When you're done writing, always use the Close method to flush any remaining data and to write the file's footer. To read from files, create a FileReader object using the NewFileReader function. You can optionally provide a list of columns to read. If these are set, only these columns are read from the file, while all other columns are ignored. If no columns are proided, then all columns are read. With the FileReader, you can then go through the row groups (using PreLoad and SkipRowGroup). and iterate through the row data in each row group (using NextRow). To find out how many rows to expect in total and per row group, use the NumRows and RowGroupNumRows methods. The number of row groups can be determined using the RowGroupCount method.

v0.12.0 • 2 years ago

github.com/hazelcast/hazelcast-go-client

Package hazelcast provides the Hazelcast Go client. Hazelcast is an open-source distributed in-memory data store and computation platform. It provides a wide variety of distributed data structures and concurrency primitives. Hazelcast Go client is a way to communicate to Hazelcast IMDG clusters and access the cluster data. If you are using Hazelcast and Go Client on the same computer, generally the default configuration should be fine. This is great for trying out the client. However, if you run the client on a different computer than any of the cluster members, you may need to do some simple configurations such as specifying the member addresses. The Hazelcast members and clients have their own configuration options. You may need to reflect some of the member side configurations on the client side to properly connect to the cluster. In order to configure the client, you only need to create a new `hazelcast.Config{}`, which you can pass to `hazelcast.StartNewClientWithConnfig` function: Calling hazelcast.StartNewClientWithConfig with the default configuration is equivalent to hazelcast.StartNewClient. The default configuration assumes Hazelcast is running at localhost:5701 with the cluster name set to dev. If you run Hazelcast members in a different server than the client, you need to make certain changes to client settings. Assuming Hazelcast members are running at hz1.server.com:5701, hz2.server.com:5701 and hz3.server.com:5701 with cluster name production, you would use the configuration below. Note that addresses must include port numbers: You can also load configuration from JSON: If you are changing several options in a configuration section, you may have to repeatedly specify the configuration section: You can simplify the code above by getting a reference to config.Cluster and update it: Note that you should get a reference to the configuration section you are updating, otherwise you would update a copy of it, which doesn't modify the configuration. There are a few options that require a duration, such as config.Cluster.HeartbeatInterval, config.Cluster.Network.ConnectionTimeout and others. You must use types.Duration instead of time.Duration with those options, since types.Duration values support human readable durations when deserialized from text: That corresponds to the following JSON configuration. Refer to https://golang.org/pkg/time/#ParseDuration for the available duration strings: Here are all configuration items with their default values: Checkout the nearcache package for the documentation about the Near Cache. You can listen to creation and destroy events for distributed objects by attaching a listener to the client. A distributed object is created when first referenced unless it already exists. Here is an example: If you don't want to receive any distributed object events, use client.RemoveDistributedObjectListener: Running SQL queries require Hazelcast 5.0 and up. Check out the Hazelcast SQL documentation here: https://docs.hazelcast.com/hazelcast/latest/sql/sql-overview The SQL support should be enabled in Hazelcast server configuration: The client supports two kinds of queries: The ones returning rows (select statements and a few others) and the rest (insert, update, etc.). The former kinds of queries are executed with QuerySQL method and the latter ones are executed with ExecSQL method. Use the question mark (?) for placeholders. To connect to a data source and query it as if it is a table, a mapping should be created. Currently, mappings for Map, Kafka and file data sources are supported. You can read the details about mappings here: https://docs.hazelcast.com/hazelcast/latest/sql/sql-overview#mappings The following data types are supported when inserting/updating. The names in parantheses correspond to SQL types: Using Date/Time In order to force using a specific date/time type, create a time.Time value and cast it to the target type: Hazelcast Management Center can monitor your clients if client-side statistics are enabled. You can enable statistics by setting config.Stats.Enabled to true. Optionally, the period of statistics collection can be set using config.Stats.Period setting. The labels set in configuration appear in the Management Center console:

v1.4.2 • 4 months ago

github.com/oracle/oci-go-sdk/v54

This is the official Go SDK for Oracle Cloud Infrastructure Refer to https://github.com/oracle/oci-go-sdk/blob/master/README.md#installing for installation instructions. Refer to https://github.com/oracle/oci-go-sdk/blob/master/README.md#configuring for configuration instructions. The following example shows how to get started with the SDK. The example belows creates an identityClient struct with the default configuration. It then utilizes the identityClient to list availability domains and prints them out to stdout More examples can be found in the SDK Github repo: https://github.com/oracle/oci-go-sdk/tree/master/example Optional fields are represented with the `mandatory:"false"` tag on input structs. The SDK will omit all optional fields that are nil when making requests. In the case of enum-type fields, the SDK will omit fields whose value is an empty string. The SDK uses pointers for primitive types in many input structs. To aid in the construction of such structs, the SDK provides functions that return a pointer for a given value. For example: The SDK exposes functionality that allows the user to customize any http request before is sent to the service. You can do so by setting the `Interceptor` field in any of the `Client` structs. For example: The Interceptor closure gets called before the signing process, thus any changes done to the request will be properly signed and submitted to the service. The SDK exposes a stand-alone signer that can be used to signing custom requests. Related code can be found here: https://github.com/oracle/oci-go-sdk/blob/master/common/http_signer.go. The example below shows how to create a default signer. The signer also allows more granular control on the headers used for signing. For example: You can combine a custom signer with the exposed clients in the SDK. This allows you to add custom signed headers to the request. Following is an example: Bear in mind that some services have a white list of headers that it expects to be signed. Therefore, adding an arbitrary header can result in authentications errors. To see a runnable example, see https://github.com/oracle/oci-go-sdk/blob/master/example/example_identity_test.go For more information on the signing algorithm refer to: https://docs.cloud.oracle.com/Content/API/Concepts/signingrequests.htm Some operations accept or return polymorphic JSON objects. The SDK models such objects as interfaces. Further the SDK provides structs that implement such interfaces. Thus, for all operations that expect interfaces as input, pass the struct in the SDK that satisfies such interface. For example: In the case of a polymorphic response you can type assert the interface to the expected type. For example: An example of polymorphic JSON request handling can be found here: https://github.com/oracle/oci-go-sdk/blob/master/example/example_core_test.go#L63 When calling a list operation, the operation will retrieve a page of results. To retrieve more data, call the list operation again, passing in the value of the most recent response's OpcNextPage as the value of Page in the next list operation call. When there is no more data the OpcNextPage field will be nil. An example of pagination using this logic can be found here: https://github.com/oracle/oci-go-sdk/blob/master/example/example_core_pagination_test.go The SDK has a built-in logging mechanism used internally. The internal logging logic is used to record the raw http requests, responses and potential errors when (un)marshalling request and responses. Built-in logging in the SDK is controlled via the environment variable "OCI_GO_SDK_DEBUG" and its contents. The below are possible values for the "OCI_GO_SDK_DEBUG" variable 1. "info" or "i" enables all info logging messages 2. "debug" or "d" enables all debug and info logging messages 3. "verbose" or "v" or "1" enables all verbose, debug and info logging messages 4. "null" turns all logging messages off. If the value of the environment variable does not match any of the above then default logging level is "info". If the environment variable is not present then no logging messages are emitted. The default destination for logging is Stderr and if you want to output log to a file you can set via environment variable "OCI_GO_SDK_LOG_OUTPUT_MODE". The below are possible values 1. "file" or "f" enables all logging output saved to file 2. "combine" or "c" enables all logging output to both stderr and file You can also customize the log file location and name via "OCI_GO_SDK_LOG_FILE" environment variable, the value should be the path to a specific file If this environment variable is not present, the default location will be the project root path Sometimes you may need to wait until an attribute of a resource, such as an instance or a VCN, reaches a certain state. An example of this would be launching an instance and then waiting for the instance to become available, or waiting until a subnet in a VCN has been terminated. You might also want to retry the same operation again if there's network issue etc... This can be accomplished by using the RequestMetadata.RetryPolicy(request level configuration), alternatively, global(all services) or client level RetryPolicy configration is also possible. You can find the examples here: https://github.com/oracle/oci-go-sdk/blob/master/example/example_retry_test.go If you are trying to make a PUT/POST API call with binary request body, please make sure the binary request body is resettable, which means the request body should inherit Seeker interface. The Retry behavior Precedence (Highest to lowest) is defined as below:- The OCI Go SDK defines a default retry policy that retries on the errors suitable for retries (see https://docs.oracle.com/en-us/iaas/Content/API/References/apierrors.htm), for a recommended period of time (up to 7 attempts spread out over at most approximately 1.5 minutes). The default retry policy is defined by : Default Retry-able Errors Below is the list of default retry-able errors for which retry attempts should be made. The following errors should be retried (with backoff). HTTP Code Customer-facing Error Code Apart from the above errors, retries should also be attempted in the following Client Side errors : 1. HTTP Connection timeout 2. Request Connection Errors 3. Request Exceptions 4. Other timeouts (like Read Timeout) The above errors can be avoided through retrying and hence, are classified as the default retry-able errors. Additionally, retries should also be made for Circuit Breaker exceptions (Exceptions raised by Circuit Breaker in an open state) Default Termination Strategy The termination strategy defines when SDKs should stop attempting to retry. In other words, it's the deadline for retries. The OCI SDKs should stop retrying the operation after 7 retry attempts. This means the SDKs will have retried for ~98 seconds or ~1.5 minutes have elapsed due to total delays. SDKs will make a total of 8 attempts. (1 initial request + 7 retries) Default Delay Strategy Default Delay Strategy - The delay strategy defines the amount of time to wait between each of the retry attempts. The default delay strategy chosen for the SDK – Exponential backoff with jitter, using: 1. The base time to use in retry calculations will be 1 second 2. An exponent of 2. When calculating the next retry time, the SDK will raise this to the power of the number of attempts 3. A maximum wait time between calls of 30 seconds (Capped) 4. Added jitter value between 0-1000 milliseconds to spread out the requests Configure and use default retry policy You can set this retry policy for a single request: or for all requests made by a client: or for all requests made by all clients: or setting default retry via environment varaible, which is a global switch for all services: Some services enable retry for operations by default, this can be overridden using any alternatives mentioned above. To know which service operations have retries enabled by default, look at the operation's description in the SDK - it will say whether that it has retries enabled by default Some resources may have to be replicated across regions and are only eventually consistent. That means the request to create, update, or delete the resource succeeded, but the resource is not available everywhere immediately. Creating, updating, or deleting any resource in the Identity service is affected by eventual consistency, and doing so may cause other operations in other services to fail until the Identity resource has been replicated. For example, the request to CreateTag in the Identity service in the home region succeeds, but immediately using that created tag in another region in a request to LaunchInstance in the Compute service may fail. If you are creating, updating, or deleting resources in the Identity service, we recommend using an eventually consistent retry policy for any service you access. The default retry policy already deals with eventual consistency. Example: This retry policy will use a different strategy if an eventually consistent change was made in the recent past (called the "eventually consistent window", currently defined to be 4 minutes after the eventually consistent change). This special retry policy for eventual consistency will: 1. make up to 9 attempts (including the initial attempt); if an attempt is successful, no more attempts will be made 2. retry at most until (a) approximately the end of the eventually consistent window or (b) the end of the default retry period of about 1.5 minutes, whichever is farther in the future; if an attempt is successful, no more attempts will be made, and the OCI Go SDK will not wait any longer 3. retry on the error codes 400-RelatedResourceNotAuthorizedOrNotFound, 404-NotAuthorizedOrNotFound, and 409-NotAuthorizedOrResourceAlreadyExists, for which the default retry policy does not retry, in addition to the errors the default retry policy retries on (see https://docs.oracle.com/en-us/iaas/Content/API/References/apierrors.htm) If there were no eventually consistent actions within the recent past, then this special retry strategy is not used. If you want a retry policy that does not handle eventual consistency in a special way, for example because you retry on all error responses, you can use DefaultRetryPolicyWithoutEventualConsistency or NewRetryPolicyWithOptions with the common.ReplaceWithValuesFromRetryPolicy(common.DefaultRetryPolicyWithoutEventualConsistency()) option: The NewRetryPolicy function also creates a retry policy without eventual consistency. Circuit Breaker can prevent an application repeatedly trying to execute an operation that is likely to fail, allowing it to continue without waiting for the fault to be rectified or wasting CPU cycles, of course, it also enables an application to detect whether the fault has been resolved. If the problem appears to have been rectified, the application can attempt to invoke the operation. Go SDK intergrates sony/gobreaker solution, wraps in a circuit breaker object, which monitors for failures. Once the failures reach a certain threshold, the circuit breaker trips, and all further calls to the circuit breaker return with an error, this also saves the service from being overwhelmed with network calls in case of an outage. Circuit Breaker Configuration Definitions 1. Failure Rate Threshold - The state of the CircuitBreaker changes from CLOSED to OPEN when the failure rate is equal or greater than a configurable threshold. For example when more than 50% of the recorded calls have failed. 2. Reset Timeout - The timeout after which an open circuit breaker will attempt a request if a request is made 3. Failure Exceptions - The list of Exceptions that will be regarded as failures for the circuit. 4. Minimum number of calls/ Volume threshold - Configures the minimum number of calls which are required (per sliding window period) before the CircuitBreaker can calculate the error rate. 1. Failure Rate Threshold - 80% - This means when 80% of the requests calculated for a time window of 120 seconds have failed then the circuit will transition from closed to open. 2. Minimum number of calls/ Volume threshold - A value of 10, for the above defined time window of 120 seconds. 3. Reset Timeout - 30 seconds to wait before setting the breaker to halfOpen state, and trying the action again. 4. Failure Exceptions - The failures for the circuit will only be recorded for the retryable/transient exceptions. This means only the following exceptions will be regarded as failure for the circuit. HTTP Code Customer-facing Error Code Apart from the above, the following client side exceptions will also be treated as a failure for the circuit : 1. HTTP Connection timeout 2. Request Connection Errors 3. Request Exceptions 4. Other timeouts (like Read Timeout) Go SDK enable circuit breaker with default configuration for most of the service clients, if you don't want to enable the solution, can disable the functionality before your application running Go SDK also supports customize Circuit Breaker with specified configurations. You can find the examples here: https://github.com/oracle/oci-go-sdk/blob/master/example/example_circuitbreaker_test.go To know which service clients have circuit breakers enabled, look at the service client's description in the SDK - it will say whether that it has circuit breakers enabled by default The GO SDK uses the net/http package to make calls to OCI services. If your environment requires you to use a proxy server for outgoing HTTP requests then you can set this up in the following ways: 1. Configuring environment variable as described here https://golang.org/pkg/net/http/#ProxyFromEnvironment 2. Modifying the underlying Transport struct for a service client In order to modify the underlying Transport struct in HttpClient, you can do something similar to (sample code for audit service client): The Object Storage service supports multipart uploads to make large object uploads easier by splitting the large object into parts. The Go SDK supports raw multipart upload operations for advanced use cases, as well as a higher level upload class that uses the multipart upload APIs. For links to the APIs used for multipart upload operations, see Managing Multipart Uploads (https://docs.cloud.oracle.com/iaas/Content/Object/Tasks/usingmultipartuploads.htm). Higher level multipart uploads are implemented using the UploadManager, which will: split a large object into parts for you, upload the parts in parallel, and then recombine and commit the parts as a single object in storage. This code sample shows how to use the UploadManager to automatically split an object into parts for upload to simplify interaction with the Object Storage service: https://github.com/oracle/oci-go-sdk/blob/master/example/example_objectstorage_test.go Some response fields are enum-typed. In the future, individual services may return values not covered by existing enums for that field. To address this possibility, every enum-type response field is a modeled as a type that supports any string. Thus if a service returns a value that is not recognized by your version of the SDK, then the response field will be set to this value. When individual services return a polymorphic JSON response not available as a concrete struct, the SDK will return an implementation that only satisfies the interface modeling the polymorphic JSON response. If you are using a version of the SDK released prior to the announcement of a new region, you may need to use a workaround to reach it, depending on whether the region is in the oraclecloud.com realm. A region is a localized geographic area. For more information on regions and how to identify them, see Regions and Availability Domains(https://docs.cloud.oracle.com/iaas/Content/General/Concepts/regions.htm). A realm is a set of regions that share entities. You can identify your realm by looking at the domain name at the end of the network address. For example, the realm for xyz.abc.123.oraclecloud.com is oraclecloud.com. oraclecloud.com Realm: For regions in the oraclecloud.com realm, even if common.Region does not contain the new region, the forward compatibility of the SDK can automatically handle it. You can pass new region names just as you would pass ones that are already defined. For more information on passing region names in the configuration, see Configuring (https://github.com/oracle/oci-go-sdk/blob/master/README.md#configuring). For details on common.Region, see (https://github.com/oracle/oci-go-sdk/blob/master/common/common.go). Other Realms: For regions in realms other than oraclecloud.com, you can use the following workarounds to reach new regions with earlier versions of the SDK. NOTE: Be sure to supply the appropriate endpoints for your region. You can overwrite the target host with client.Host: If you are authenticating via instance principals, you can set the authentication endpoint in an environment variable: Got a fix for a bug, or a new feature you'd like to contribute? The SDK is open source and accepting pull requests on GitHub https://github.com/oracle/oci-go-sdk Licensing information available at: https://github.com/oracle/oci-go-sdk/blob/master/LICENSE.txt To be notified when a new version of the Go SDK is released, subscribe to the following feed: https://github.com/oracle/oci-go-sdk/releases.atom Please refer to this link: https://github.com/oracle/oci-go-sdk#help

v54.0.0 • 3 years ago

github.com/oracle/oci-go-sdk/v65

This is the official Go SDK for Oracle Cloud Infrastructure Refer to https://github.com/oracle/oci-go-sdk/blob/master/README.md#installing for installation instructions. Refer to https://github.com/oracle/oci-go-sdk/blob/master/README.md#configuring for configuration instructions. The following example shows how to get started with the SDK. The example belows creates an identityClient struct with the default configuration. It then utilizes the identityClient to list availability domains and prints them out to stdout More examples can be found in the SDK Github repo: https://github.com/oracle/oci-go-sdk/tree/master/example Optional fields are represented with the `mandatory:"false"` tag on input structs. The SDK will omit all optional fields that are nil when making requests. In the case of enum-type fields, the SDK will omit fields whose value is an empty string. The SDK uses pointers for primitive types in many input structs. To aid in the construction of such structs, the SDK provides functions that return a pointer for a given value. For example: Dedicated endpoints are the endpoint templates defined by the service for a specific realm at client level. OCI Go SDK allows you to enable the use of these realm-specific endpoint templates feature at application level and at client level. The value set at client level takes precedence over the value set at the application level. This feature is disabled by default. For reference, please refer https://github.com/oracle/oci-go-sdk/blob/master/example/example_objectstorage_test.go#L222-L251 The SDK exposes functionality that allows the user to customize any http request before is sent to the service. You can do so by setting the `Interceptor` field in any of the `Client` structs. For example: The Interceptor closure gets called before the signing process, thus any changes done to the request will be properly signed and submitted to the service. The SDK exposes a stand-alone signer that can be used to signing custom requests. Related code can be found here: https://github.com/oracle/oci-go-sdk/blob/master/common/http_signer.go. The example below shows how to create a default signer. The signer also allows more granular control on the headers used for signing. For example: You can combine a custom signer with the exposed clients in the SDK. This allows you to add custom signed headers to the request. Following is an example: Bear in mind that some services have a white list of headers that it expects to be signed. Therefore, adding an arbitrary header can result in authentications errors. To see a runnable example, see https://github.com/oracle/oci-go-sdk/blob/master/example/example_identity_test.go For more information on the signing algorithm refer to: https://docs.cloud.oracle.com/Content/API/Concepts/signingrequests.htm Some operations accept or return polymorphic JSON objects. The SDK models such objects as interfaces. Further the SDK provides structs that implement such interfaces. Thus, for all operations that expect interfaces as input, pass the struct in the SDK that satisfies such interface. For example: In the case of a polymorphic response you can type assert the interface to the expected type. For example: An example of polymorphic JSON request handling can be found here: https://github.com/oracle/oci-go-sdk/blob/master/example/example_core_test.go#L63 When calling a list operation, the operation will retrieve a page of results. To retrieve more data, call the list operation again, passing in the value of the most recent response's OpcNextPage as the value of Page in the next list operation call. When there is no more data the OpcNextPage field will be nil. An example of pagination using this logic can be found here: https://github.com/oracle/oci-go-sdk/blob/master/example/example_core_pagination_test.go The SDK has a built-in logging mechanism used internally. The internal logging logic is used to record the raw http requests, responses and potential errors when (un)marshalling request and responses. Built-in logging in the SDK is controlled via the environment variable "OCI_GO_SDK_DEBUG" and its contents. The below are possible values for the "OCI_GO_SDK_DEBUG" variable 1. "info" or "i" enables all info logging messages 2. "debug" or "d" enables all debug and info logging messages 3. "verbose" or "v" or "1" enables all verbose, debug and info logging messages 4. "null" turns all logging messages off. If the value of the environment variable does not match any of the above then default logging level is "info". If the environment variable is not present then no logging messages are emitted. You can also enable logs by code. For example This way you enable debug logs by code. The default destination for logging is Stderr and if you want to output log to a file you can set via environment variable "OCI_GO_SDK_LOG_OUTPUT_MODE". The below are possible values 1. "file" or "f" enables all logging output saved to file 2. "combine" or "c" enables all logging output to both stderr and file You can also customize the log file location and name via "OCI_GO_SDK_LOG_FILE" environment variable, the value should be the path to a specific file If this environment variable is not present, the default location will be the project root path Sometimes you may need to wait until an attribute of a resource, such as an instance or a VCN, reaches a certain state. An example of this would be launching an instance and then waiting for the instance to become available, or waiting until a subnet in a VCN has been terminated. You might also want to retry the same operation again if there's network issue etc... This can be accomplished by using the RequestMetadata.RetryPolicy(request level configuration), alternatively, global(all services) or client level RetryPolicy configration is also possible. You can find the examples here: https://github.com/oracle/oci-go-sdk/blob/master/example/example_retry_test.go If you are trying to make a PUT/POST API call with binary request body, please make sure the binary request body is resettable, which means the request body should inherit Seeker interface. The Retry behavior Precedence (Highest to lowest) is defined as below:- The OCI Go SDK defines a default retry policy that retries on the errors suitable for retries (see https://docs.oracle.com/en-us/iaas/Content/API/References/apierrors.htm), for a recommended period of time (up to 7 attempts spread out over at most approximately 1.5 minutes). The default retry policy is defined by : Default Retry-able Errors Below is the list of default retry-able errors for which retry attempts should be made. The following errors should be retried (with backoff). HTTP Code Customer-facing Error Code Apart from the above errors, retries should also be attempted in the following Client Side errors : 1. HTTP Connection timeout 2. Request Connection Errors 3. Request Exceptions 4. Other timeouts (like Read Timeout) The above errors can be avoided through retrying and hence, are classified as the default retry-able errors. Additionally, retries should also be made for Circuit Breaker exceptions (Exceptions raised by Circuit Breaker in an open state) Default Termination Strategy The termination strategy defines when SDKs should stop attempting to retry. In other words, it's the deadline for retries. The OCI SDKs should stop retrying the operation after 7 retry attempts. This means the SDKs will have retried for ~98 seconds or ~1.5 minutes have elapsed due to total delays. SDKs will make a total of 8 attempts. (1 initial request + 7 retries) Default Delay Strategy Default Delay Strategy - The delay strategy defines the amount of time to wait between each of the retry attempts. The default delay strategy chosen for the SDK – Exponential backoff with jitter, using: 1. The base time to use in retry calculations will be 1 second 2. An exponent of 2. When calculating the next retry time, the SDK will raise this to the power of the number of attempts 3. A maximum wait time between calls of 30 seconds (Capped) 4. Added jitter value between 0-1000 milliseconds to spread out the requests Configure and use default retry policy You can set this retry policy for a single request: or for all requests made by a client: or for all requests made by all clients: or setting default retry via environment variable, which is a global switch for all services: Some services enable retry for operations by default, this can be overridden using any alternatives mentioned above. To know which service operations have retries enabled by default, look at the operation's description in the SDK - it will say whether that it has retries enabled by default Some resources may have to be replicated across regions and are only eventually consistent. That means the request to create, update, or delete the resource succeeded, but the resource is not available everywhere immediately. Creating, updating, or deleting any resource in the Identity service is affected by eventual consistency, and doing so may cause other operations in other services to fail until the Identity resource has been replicated. For example, the request to CreateTag in the Identity service in the home region succeeds, but immediately using that created tag in another region in a request to LaunchInstance in the Compute service may fail. If you are creating, updating, or deleting resources in the Identity service, we recommend using an eventually consistent retry policy for any service you access. The default retry policy already deals with eventual consistency. Example: This retry policy will use a different strategy if an eventually consistent change was made in the recent past (called the "eventually consistent window", currently defined to be 4 minutes after the eventually consistent change). This special retry policy for eventual consistency will: 1. make up to 9 attempts (including the initial attempt); if an attempt is successful, no more attempts will be made 2. retry at most until (a) approximately the end of the eventually consistent window or (b) the end of the default retry period of about 1.5 minutes, whichever is farther in the future; if an attempt is successful, no more attempts will be made, and the OCI Go SDK will not wait any longer 3. retry on the error codes 400-RelatedResourceNotAuthorizedOrNotFound, 404-NotAuthorizedOrNotFound, and 409-NotAuthorizedOrResourceAlreadyExists, for which the default retry policy does not retry, in addition to the errors the default retry policy retries on (see https://docs.oracle.com/en-us/iaas/Content/API/References/apierrors.htm) If there were no eventually consistent actions within the recent past, then this special retry strategy is not used. If you want a retry policy that does not handle eventual consistency in a special way, for example because you retry on all error responses, you can use DefaultRetryPolicyWithoutEventualConsistency or NewRetryPolicyWithOptions with the common.ReplaceWithValuesFromRetryPolicy(common.DefaultRetryPolicyWithoutEventualConsistency()) option: The NewRetryPolicy function also creates a retry policy without eventual consistency. Circuit Breaker can prevent an application repeatedly trying to execute an operation that is likely to fail, allowing it to continue without waiting for the fault to be rectified or wasting CPU cycles, of course, it also enables an application to detect whether the fault has been resolved. If the problem appears to have been rectified, the application can attempt to invoke the operation. Go SDK intergrates sony/gobreaker solution, wraps in a circuit breaker object, which monitors for failures. Once the failures reach a certain threshold, the circuit breaker trips, and all further calls to the circuit breaker return with an error, this also saves the service from being overwhelmed with network calls in case of an outage. Circuit Breaker Configuration Definitions 1. Failure Rate Threshold - The state of the CircuitBreaker changes from CLOSED to OPEN when the failure rate is equal or greater than a configurable threshold. For example when more than 50% of the recorded calls have failed. 2. Reset Timeout - The timeout after which an open circuit breaker will attempt a request if a request is made 3. Failure Exceptions - The list of Exceptions that will be regarded as failures for the circuit. 4. Minimum number of calls/ Volume threshold - Configures the minimum number of calls which are required (per sliding window period) before the CircuitBreaker can calculate the error rate. 1. Failure Rate Threshold - 80% - This means when 80% of the requests calculated for a time window of 120 seconds have failed then the circuit will transition from closed to open. 2. Minimum number of calls/ Volume threshold - A value of 10, for the above defined time window of 120 seconds. 3. Reset Timeout - 30 seconds to wait before setting the breaker to halfOpen state, and trying the action again. 4. Failure Exceptions - The failures for the circuit will only be recorded for the retryable/transient exceptions. This means only the following exceptions will be regarded as failure for the circuit. HTTP Code Customer-facing Error Code Apart from the above, the following client side exceptions will also be treated as a failure for the circuit : 1. HTTP Connection timeout 2. Request Connection Errors 3. Request Exceptions 4. Other timeouts (like Read Timeout) Go SDK enable circuit breaker with default configuration for most of the service clients, if you don't want to enable the solution, can disable the functionality before your application running Go SDK also supports customize Circuit Breaker with specified configurations. You can find the examples here: https://github.com/oracle/oci-go-sdk/blob/master/example/example_circuitbreaker_test.go To know which service clients have circuit breakers enabled, look at the service client's description in the SDK - it will say whether that it has circuit breakers enabled by default As a result of the SDK treating responses with a non-2xx HTTP status code as an error, the SDK will produce an error on 3xx responses. This can impact operations which support conditional GETs, such as GetObject() and HeadObject() methods as these can return responses with an HTTP status code of 304 if passed an 'IfNoneMatch' that corresponds to the current etag of the object / bucket. In order to account for this, you should check for status code 304 when an error is produced. For example: The GO SDK uses the net/http package to make calls to OCI services. If your environment requires you to use a proxy server for outgoing HTTP requests then you can set this up in the following ways: 1. Configuring environment variable as described here https://golang.org/pkg/net/http/#ProxyFromEnvironment 2. Modifying the underlying Transport struct for a service client In order to modify the underlying Transport struct in HttpClient, you can do something similar to (sample code for audit service client): The Object Storage service supports multipart uploads to make large object uploads easier by splitting the large object into parts. The Go SDK supports raw multipart upload operations for advanced use cases, as well as a higher level upload class that uses the multipart upload APIs. For links to the APIs used for multipart upload operations, see Managing Multipart Uploads (https://docs.cloud.oracle.com/iaas/Content/Object/Tasks/usingmultipartuploads.htm). Higher level multipart uploads are implemented using the UploadManager, which will: split a large object into parts for you, upload the parts in parallel, and then recombine and commit the parts as a single object in storage. This code sample shows how to use the UploadManager to automatically split an object into parts for upload to simplify interaction with the Object Storage service: https://github.com/oracle/oci-go-sdk/blob/master/example/example_objectstorage_test.go Some response fields are enum-typed. In the future, individual services may return values not covered by existing enums for that field. To address this possibility, every enum-type response field is a modeled as a type that supports any string. Thus if a service returns a value that is not recognized by your version of the SDK, then the response field will be set to this value. When individual services return a polymorphic JSON response not available as a concrete struct, the SDK will return an implementation that only satisfies the interface modeling the polymorphic JSON response. If you are using a version of the SDK released prior to the announcement of a new region, you may need to use a workaround to reach it, depending on whether the region is in the oraclecloud.com realm. A region is a localized geographic area. For more information on regions and how to identify them, see Regions and Availability Domains(https://docs.cloud.oracle.com/iaas/Content/General/Concepts/regions.htm). A realm is a set of regions that share entities. You can identify your realm by looking at the domain name at the end of the network address. For example, the realm for xyz.abc.123.oraclecloud.com is oraclecloud.com. oraclecloud.com Realm: For regions in the oraclecloud.com realm, even if common.Region does not contain the new region, the forward compatibility of the SDK can automatically handle it. You can pass new region names just as you would pass ones that are already defined. For more information on passing region names in the configuration, see Configuring (https://github.com/oracle/oci-go-sdk/blob/master/README.md#configuring). For details on common.Region, see (https://github.com/oracle/oci-go-sdk/blob/master/common/common.go). Other Realms: For regions in realms other than oraclecloud.com, you can use the following workarounds to reach new regions with earlier versions of the SDK. NOTE: Be sure to supply the appropriate endpoints for your region. You can overwrite the target host with client.Host: If you are authenticating via instance principals, you can set the authentication endpoint in an environment variable: In order to use a custom CA bundle, you can set the environment variable OCI_DEFAULT_CERTS_PATH to point to the path of custom CA Bundle you want the OCI GO SDK to use while making API calls to the OCI services If you additionally want to set custom leaf/client certs, then you can use the the environment variables OCI_DEFAULT_CLIENT_CERTS_PATH and OCI_DEFAULT_CLIENT_CERTS_PRIVATE_KEY_PATH to set the path of the custom client/leaf cert and the private key respectively. The default refresh interval for custom CA bundle or client certs is 30 minutes. If you want to modify this, then you can configure the refresh interval in minutes by using either the Global property OciGlobalRefreshIntervalForCustomCerts defined in the common package or set the environment variable OCI_DEFAULT_REFRESH_INTERVAL_FOR_CUSTOM_CERTS to set it instead. Please note, that the property OciGlobalRefreshIntervalForCustomCerts has a higher precedence than the environment variable OCI_DEFAULT_REFRESH_INTERVAL_FOR_CUSTOM_CERTS. If this value is negative, then it would be assumed that it is unset. If it is set to 0, then the SDK would disable the custom ca bundle and client cert refresh Got a fix for a bug, or a new feature you'd like to contribute? The SDK is open source and accepting pull requests on GitHub https://github.com/oracle/oci-go-sdk Licensing information available at: https://github.com/oracle/oci-go-sdk/blob/master/LICENSE.txt To be notified when a new version of the Go SDK is released, subscribe to the following feed: https://github.com/oracle/oci-go-sdk/releases.atom Please refer to this link: https://github.com/oracle/oci-go-sdk#help

v65.79.0 • 2 days ago

github.com/oracle/oci-go-sdk/v60

This is the official Go SDK for Oracle Cloud Infrastructure Refer to https://github.com/oracle/oci-go-sdk/blob/master/README.md#installing for installation instructions. Refer to https://github.com/oracle/oci-go-sdk/blob/master/README.md#configuring for configuration instructions. The following example shows how to get started with the SDK. The example belows creates an identityClient struct with the default configuration. It then utilizes the identityClient to list availability domains and prints them out to stdout More examples can be found in the SDK Github repo: https://github.com/oracle/oci-go-sdk/tree/master/example Optional fields are represented with the `mandatory:"false"` tag on input structs. The SDK will omit all optional fields that are nil when making requests. In the case of enum-type fields, the SDK will omit fields whose value is an empty string. The SDK uses pointers for primitive types in many input structs. To aid in the construction of such structs, the SDK provides functions that return a pointer for a given value. For example: The SDK exposes functionality that allows the user to customize any http request before is sent to the service. You can do so by setting the `Interceptor` field in any of the `Client` structs. For example: The Interceptor closure gets called before the signing process, thus any changes done to the request will be properly signed and submitted to the service. The SDK exposes a stand-alone signer that can be used to signing custom requests. Related code can be found here: https://github.com/oracle/oci-go-sdk/blob/master/common/http_signer.go. The example below shows how to create a default signer. The signer also allows more granular control on the headers used for signing. For example: You can combine a custom signer with the exposed clients in the SDK. This allows you to add custom signed headers to the request. Following is an example: Bear in mind that some services have a white list of headers that it expects to be signed. Therefore, adding an arbitrary header can result in authentications errors. To see a runnable example, see https://github.com/oracle/oci-go-sdk/blob/master/example/example_identity_test.go For more information on the signing algorithm refer to: https://docs.cloud.oracle.com/Content/API/Concepts/signingrequests.htm Some operations accept or return polymorphic JSON objects. The SDK models such objects as interfaces. Further the SDK provides structs that implement such interfaces. Thus, for all operations that expect interfaces as input, pass the struct in the SDK that satisfies such interface. For example: In the case of a polymorphic response you can type assert the interface to the expected type. For example: An example of polymorphic JSON request handling can be found here: https://github.com/oracle/oci-go-sdk/blob/master/example/example_core_test.go#L63 When calling a list operation, the operation will retrieve a page of results. To retrieve more data, call the list operation again, passing in the value of the most recent response's OpcNextPage as the value of Page in the next list operation call. When there is no more data the OpcNextPage field will be nil. An example of pagination using this logic can be found here: https://github.com/oracle/oci-go-sdk/blob/master/example/example_core_pagination_test.go The SDK has a built-in logging mechanism used internally. The internal logging logic is used to record the raw http requests, responses and potential errors when (un)marshalling request and responses. Built-in logging in the SDK is controlled via the environment variable "OCI_GO_SDK_DEBUG" and its contents. The below are possible values for the "OCI_GO_SDK_DEBUG" variable 1. "info" or "i" enables all info logging messages 2. "debug" or "d" enables all debug and info logging messages 3. "verbose" or "v" or "1" enables all verbose, debug and info logging messages 4. "null" turns all logging messages off. If the value of the environment variable does not match any of the above then default logging level is "info". If the environment variable is not present then no logging messages are emitted. The default destination for logging is Stderr and if you want to output log to a file you can set via environment variable "OCI_GO_SDK_LOG_OUTPUT_MODE". The below are possible values 1. "file" or "f" enables all logging output saved to file 2. "combine" or "c" enables all logging output to both stderr and file You can also customize the log file location and name via "OCI_GO_SDK_LOG_FILE" environment variable, the value should be the path to a specific file If this environment variable is not present, the default location will be the project root path Sometimes you may need to wait until an attribute of a resource, such as an instance or a VCN, reaches a certain state. An example of this would be launching an instance and then waiting for the instance to become available, or waiting until a subnet in a VCN has been terminated. You might also want to retry the same operation again if there's network issue etc... This can be accomplished by using the RequestMetadata.RetryPolicy(request level configuration), alternatively, global(all services) or client level RetryPolicy configration is also possible. You can find the examples here: https://github.com/oracle/oci-go-sdk/blob/master/example/example_retry_test.go If you are trying to make a PUT/POST API call with binary request body, please make sure the binary request body is resettable, which means the request body should inherit Seeker interface. The Retry behavior Precedence (Highest to lowest) is defined as below:- The OCI Go SDK defines a default retry policy that retries on the errors suitable for retries (see https://docs.oracle.com/en-us/iaas/Content/API/References/apierrors.htm), for a recommended period of time (up to 7 attempts spread out over at most approximately 1.5 minutes). The default retry policy is defined by : Default Retry-able Errors Below is the list of default retry-able errors for which retry attempts should be made. The following errors should be retried (with backoff). HTTP Code Customer-facing Error Code Apart from the above errors, retries should also be attempted in the following Client Side errors : 1. HTTP Connection timeout 2. Request Connection Errors 3. Request Exceptions 4. Other timeouts (like Read Timeout) The above errors can be avoided through retrying and hence, are classified as the default retry-able errors. Additionally, retries should also be made for Circuit Breaker exceptions (Exceptions raised by Circuit Breaker in an open state) Default Termination Strategy The termination strategy defines when SDKs should stop attempting to retry. In other words, it's the deadline for retries. The OCI SDKs should stop retrying the operation after 7 retry attempts. This means the SDKs will have retried for ~98 seconds or ~1.5 minutes have elapsed due to total delays. SDKs will make a total of 8 attempts. (1 initial request + 7 retries) Default Delay Strategy Default Delay Strategy - The delay strategy defines the amount of time to wait between each of the retry attempts. The default delay strategy chosen for the SDK – Exponential backoff with jitter, using: 1. The base time to use in retry calculations will be 1 second 2. An exponent of 2. When calculating the next retry time, the SDK will raise this to the power of the number of attempts 3. A maximum wait time between calls of 30 seconds (Capped) 4. Added jitter value between 0-1000 milliseconds to spread out the requests Configure and use default retry policy You can set this retry policy for a single request: or for all requests made by a client: or for all requests made by all clients: or setting default retry via environment varaible, which is a global switch for all services: Some services enable retry for operations by default, this can be overridden using any alternatives mentioned above. To know which service operations have retries enabled by default, look at the operation's description in the SDK - it will say whether that it has retries enabled by default Some resources may have to be replicated across regions and are only eventually consistent. That means the request to create, update, or delete the resource succeeded, but the resource is not available everywhere immediately. Creating, updating, or deleting any resource in the Identity service is affected by eventual consistency, and doing so may cause other operations in other services to fail until the Identity resource has been replicated. For example, the request to CreateTag in the Identity service in the home region succeeds, but immediately using that created tag in another region in a request to LaunchInstance in the Compute service may fail. If you are creating, updating, or deleting resources in the Identity service, we recommend using an eventually consistent retry policy for any service you access. The default retry policy already deals with eventual consistency. Example: This retry policy will use a different strategy if an eventually consistent change was made in the recent past (called the "eventually consistent window", currently defined to be 4 minutes after the eventually consistent change). This special retry policy for eventual consistency will: 1. make up to 9 attempts (including the initial attempt); if an attempt is successful, no more attempts will be made 2. retry at most until (a) approximately the end of the eventually consistent window or (b) the end of the default retry period of about 1.5 minutes, whichever is farther in the future; if an attempt is successful, no more attempts will be made, and the OCI Go SDK will not wait any longer 3. retry on the error codes 400-RelatedResourceNotAuthorizedOrNotFound, 404-NotAuthorizedOrNotFound, and 409-NotAuthorizedOrResourceAlreadyExists, for which the default retry policy does not retry, in addition to the errors the default retry policy retries on (see https://docs.oracle.com/en-us/iaas/Content/API/References/apierrors.htm) If there were no eventually consistent actions within the recent past, then this special retry strategy is not used. If you want a retry policy that does not handle eventual consistency in a special way, for example because you retry on all error responses, you can use DefaultRetryPolicyWithoutEventualConsistency or NewRetryPolicyWithOptions with the common.ReplaceWithValuesFromRetryPolicy(common.DefaultRetryPolicyWithoutEventualConsistency()) option: The NewRetryPolicy function also creates a retry policy without eventual consistency. Circuit Breaker can prevent an application repeatedly trying to execute an operation that is likely to fail, allowing it to continue without waiting for the fault to be rectified or wasting CPU cycles, of course, it also enables an application to detect whether the fault has been resolved. If the problem appears to have been rectified, the application can attempt to invoke the operation. Go SDK intergrates sony/gobreaker solution, wraps in a circuit breaker object, which monitors for failures. Once the failures reach a certain threshold, the circuit breaker trips, and all further calls to the circuit breaker return with an error, this also saves the service from being overwhelmed with network calls in case of an outage. Circuit Breaker Configuration Definitions 1. Failure Rate Threshold - The state of the CircuitBreaker changes from CLOSED to OPEN when the failure rate is equal or greater than a configurable threshold. For example when more than 50% of the recorded calls have failed. 2. Reset Timeout - The timeout after which an open circuit breaker will attempt a request if a request is made 3. Failure Exceptions - The list of Exceptions that will be regarded as failures for the circuit. 4. Minimum number of calls/ Volume threshold - Configures the minimum number of calls which are required (per sliding window period) before the CircuitBreaker can calculate the error rate. 1. Failure Rate Threshold - 80% - This means when 80% of the requests calculated for a time window of 120 seconds have failed then the circuit will transition from closed to open. 2. Minimum number of calls/ Volume threshold - A value of 10, for the above defined time window of 120 seconds. 3. Reset Timeout - 30 seconds to wait before setting the breaker to halfOpen state, and trying the action again. 4. Failure Exceptions - The failures for the circuit will only be recorded for the retryable/transient exceptions. This means only the following exceptions will be regarded as failure for the circuit. HTTP Code Customer-facing Error Code Apart from the above, the following client side exceptions will also be treated as a failure for the circuit : 1. HTTP Connection timeout 2. Request Connection Errors 3. Request Exceptions 4. Other timeouts (like Read Timeout) Go SDK enable circuit breaker with default configuration for most of the service clients, if you don't want to enable the solution, can disable the functionality before your application running Go SDK also supports customize Circuit Breaker with specified configurations. You can find the examples here: https://github.com/oracle/oci-go-sdk/blob/master/example/example_circuitbreaker_test.go To know which service clients have circuit breakers enabled, look at the service client's description in the SDK - it will say whether that it has circuit breakers enabled by default The GO SDK uses the net/http package to make calls to OCI services. If your environment requires you to use a proxy server for outgoing HTTP requests then you can set this up in the following ways: 1. Configuring environment variable as described here https://golang.org/pkg/net/http/#ProxyFromEnvironment 2. Modifying the underlying Transport struct for a service client In order to modify the underlying Transport struct in HttpClient, you can do something similar to (sample code for audit service client): The Object Storage service supports multipart uploads to make large object uploads easier by splitting the large object into parts. The Go SDK supports raw multipart upload operations for advanced use cases, as well as a higher level upload class that uses the multipart upload APIs. For links to the APIs used for multipart upload operations, see Managing Multipart Uploads (https://docs.cloud.oracle.com/iaas/Content/Object/Tasks/usingmultipartuploads.htm). Higher level multipart uploads are implemented using the UploadManager, which will: split a large object into parts for you, upload the parts in parallel, and then recombine and commit the parts as a single object in storage. This code sample shows how to use the UploadManager to automatically split an object into parts for upload to simplify interaction with the Object Storage service: https://github.com/oracle/oci-go-sdk/blob/master/example/example_objectstorage_test.go Some response fields are enum-typed. In the future, individual services may return values not covered by existing enums for that field. To address this possibility, every enum-type response field is a modeled as a type that supports any string. Thus if a service returns a value that is not recognized by your version of the SDK, then the response field will be set to this value. When individual services return a polymorphic JSON response not available as a concrete struct, the SDK will return an implementation that only satisfies the interface modeling the polymorphic JSON response. If you are using a version of the SDK released prior to the announcement of a new region, you may need to use a workaround to reach it, depending on whether the region is in the oraclecloud.com realm. A region is a localized geographic area. For more information on regions and how to identify them, see Regions and Availability Domains(https://docs.cloud.oracle.com/iaas/Content/General/Concepts/regions.htm). A realm is a set of regions that share entities. You can identify your realm by looking at the domain name at the end of the network address. For example, the realm for xyz.abc.123.oraclecloud.com is oraclecloud.com. oraclecloud.com Realm: For regions in the oraclecloud.com realm, even if common.Region does not contain the new region, the forward compatibility of the SDK can automatically handle it. You can pass new region names just as you would pass ones that are already defined. For more information on passing region names in the configuration, see Configuring (https://github.com/oracle/oci-go-sdk/blob/master/README.md#configuring). For details on common.Region, see (https://github.com/oracle/oci-go-sdk/blob/master/common/common.go). Other Realms: For regions in realms other than oraclecloud.com, you can use the following workarounds to reach new regions with earlier versions of the SDK. NOTE: Be sure to supply the appropriate endpoints for your region. You can overwrite the target host with client.Host: If you are authenticating via instance principals, you can set the authentication endpoint in an environment variable: Got a fix for a bug, or a new feature you'd like to contribute? The SDK is open source and accepting pull requests on GitHub https://github.com/oracle/oci-go-sdk Licensing information available at: https://github.com/oracle/oci-go-sdk/blob/master/LICENSE.txt To be notified when a new version of the Go SDK is released, subscribe to the following feed: https://github.com/oracle/oci-go-sdk/releases.atom Please refer to this link: https://github.com/oracle/oci-go-sdk#help

v60.0.0 • 3 years ago

github.com/google/go-replayers/grpcreplay

Package grpcreplay supports the capture and replay of gRPC calls. Its main goal is to improve testing. Once you capture the calls of a test that runs against a real service, you have an "automatic mock" that can be replayed against the same test, yielding a unit test that is fast and flake-free. To record a sequence of gRPC calls to a file, create a Recorder and pass its DialOptions to grpc.Dial: It is essential to close the Recorder when the interaction is finished. There is also a NewRecorderWriter function for capturing to an arbitrary io.Writer. To replay a captured file, create a Replayer and ask it for a (fake) connection. We don't actually have to dial a server. (Since we're reading the file and not writing it, we don't have to be as careful about the error returned from Close). A test might use random or time-sensitive values, for instance to create unique resources for isolation from other tests. The test therefore has initial values, such as the current time, or a random seed, that differ from run to run. You must record this initial state and re-establish it on replay. To record the initial state, serialize it into a []byte and pass it as the second argument to NewRecorder: On replay, get the bytes from Replayer.Initial: Recorders and replayers have support for running callbacks before messages are written to or read from the replay file. A Recorder has a BeforeFunc that can modify a request or response before it is written to the replay file. The actual RPCs sent to the service during recording remain unaltered; only what is saved in the replay file can be changed. A Replayer has a BeforeFunc that can modify a request before it is sent for matching. Example uses for these callbacks include customized logging, or scrubbing data before RPCs are written to the replay file. If requests are modified by the callbacks during recording, it is important to perform the same modifications to the requests when replaying, or RPC matching on replay will fail. A common way to analyze and modify the various messages is to use a type switch. A nondeterministic program may invoke RPCs in a different order each time it is run. The order in which RPCs are called during recording may differ from the order during replay. The replayer matches incoming to recorded requests by method name and request contents, so nondeterminism is only a concern for identical requests that result in different responses. A nondeterministic program whose behavior differs depending on the order of such RPCs probably has a race condition: since both the recorded sequence of RPCs and the sequence during replay are valid orderings, the program should behave the same under both. The same is not true of streaming RPCs. The replayer matches streams only by method name, since it has no other information at the time the stream is opened. Two streams with the same method name that are started concurrently may replay in the wrong order. Besides the differences in replay mentioned above, other differences may cause issues for some programs. We list them here. The Replayer delivers a response to an RPC immediately, without waiting for other incoming RPCs. This can violate causality. For example, in a Pub/Sub program where one goroutine publishes and another subscribes, during replay the Subscribe call may finish before the Publish call begins. For streaming RPCs, the Replayer delivers the result of Send and Recv calls in the order they were recorded. No attempt is made to match message contents. At present, this package does not record or replay stream headers and trailers, or the result of the CloseSend method.

v1.3.0 • 4 months ago

github.com/deanishe/awgo

Package aw is a "plug-and-play" workflow development library/framework for Alfred 3 & 4 (https://www.alfredapp.com/). It requires Go 1.13 or later. It provides everything you need to create a polished and blazing-fast Alfred frontend for your project. As of AwGo 0.26, all applicable features of Alfred 4.1 are supported. The main features are: AwGo is an opinionated framework that expects to be used in a certain way in order to eliminate boilerplate. It *will* panic if not run in a valid, minimally Alfred-like environment. At a minimum the following environment variables should be set to meaningful values: NOTE: AwGo is currently in development. The API *will* change and should not be considered stable until v1.0. Until then, be sure to pin a version using go modules or similar. Be sure to also check out the _examples/ subdirectory, which contains some simple, but complete, workflows that demonstrate the features of AwGo and useful workflow idioms. Typically, you'd call your program's main entry point via Workflow.Run(). This way, the library will rescue any panic, log the stack trace and show an error message to the user in Alfred. In the Script box (Language = "/bin/bash"): To generate results for Alfred to show in a Script Filter, use the feedback API of Workflow: You can set workflow variables (via feedback) with Workflow.Var, Item.Var and Modifier.Var. See Workflow.SendFeedback for more documentation. Alfred requires a different JSON format if you wish to set workflow variables. Use the ArgVars (named for its equivalent element in Alfred) struct to generate output from Run Script actions. Be sure to set TextErrors to true to prevent Workflow from generating Alfred JSON if it catches a panic: See ArgVars for more information. New() creates a *Workflow using the default values and workflow settings read from environment variables set by Alfred. You can change defaults by passing one or more Options to New(). If you do not want to use Alfred's environment variables, or they aren't set (i.e. you're not running the code in Alfred), use NewFromEnv() with a custom Env implementation. A Workflow can be re-configured later using its Configure() method. See the documentation for Option for more information on configuring a Workflow. AwGo can check for and install new versions of your workflow. Subpackage update provides an implementation of the Updater interface and sources to load updates from GitHub or Gitea releases, or from the URL of an Alfred `metadata.json` file. See subpackage update and _examples/update. AwGo can filter Script Filter feedback using a Sublime Text-like fuzzy matching algorithm. Workflow.Filter() sorts feedback Items against the provided query, removing those that do not match. See _examples/fuzzy for a basic demonstration, and _examples/bookmarks for a demonstration of implementing fuzzy.Sortable on your own structs and customising the fuzzy sort settings. Fuzzy matching is done by package https://godoc.org/go.deanishe.net/fuzzy AwGo automatically configures the default log package to write to STDERR (Alfred's debugger) and a log file in the workflow's cache directory. The log file is necessary because background processes aren't connected to Alfred, so their output is only visible in the log. It is rotated when it exceeds 1 MiB in size. One previous log is kept. AwGo detects when Alfred's debugger is open (Workflow.Debug() returns true) and in this case prepends filename:linenumber: to log messages. The Config struct (which is included in Workflow as Workflow.Config) provides an interface to the workflow's settings from the Workflow Environment Variables panel (see https://www.alfredapp.com/help/workflows/advanced/variables/#environment). Alfred exports these settings as environment variables, and you can read them ad-hoc with the Config.Get*() methods, and save values back to Alfred/info.plist with Config.Set(). Using Config.To() and Config.From(), you can "bind" your own structs to the settings in Alfred: See the documentation for Config.To and Config.From for more information, and _examples/settings for a demo workflow based on the API. The Alfred struct provides methods for the rest of Alfred's AppleScript API. Amongst other things, you can use it to tell Alfred to open, to search for a query, to browse/action files & directories, or to run External Triggers. See documentation of the Alfred struct for more information. AwGo provides a basic, but useful, API for loading and saving data. In addition to reading/writing bytes and marshalling/unmarshalling to/from JSON, the API can auto-refresh expired cache data. See Cache and Session for the API documentation. Workflow has three caches tied to different directories: These all share (almost) the same API. The difference is in when the data go away. Data saved with Session are deleted after the user closes Alfred or starts using a different workflow. The Cache directory is in a system cache directory, so may be deleted by the system or "system maintenance" tools. The Data directory lives with Alfred's application data and would not normally be deleted. Subpackage util provides several functions for running script files and snippets of AppleScript/JavaScript code. See util for documentation and examples. AwGo offers a simple API to start/stop background processes via Workflow's RunInBackground(), IsRunning() and Kill() methods. This is useful for running checks for updates and other jobs that hit the network or take a significant amount of time to complete, allowing you to keep your Script Filters extremely responsive. See _examples/update and _examples/workflows for demonstrations of this API.

v0.29.1 • 3 years ago

github.com/reiver/go-telnet

Package telnet provides TELNET and TELNETS client and server implementations in a style similar to the "net/http" library that is part of the Go standard library, including support for "middleware"; TELNETS is secure TELNET, with the TELNET protocol over a secured TLS (or SSL) connection. ListenAndServe starts a (un-secure) TELNET server with a given address and handler. ListenAndServeTLS starts a (secure) TELNETS server with a given address and handler, using the specified "cert.pem" and "key.pem" files. Example TELNET Client: DialToAndCall creates a (un-secure) TELNET client, which connects to a given address using the specified caller. Example TELNETS Client: DialToAndCallTLS creates a (secure) TELNETS client, which connects to a given address using the specified caller. If you are communicating over the open Internet, you should be using (the secure) TELNETS protocol and ListenAndServeTLS. If you are communicating just on localhost, then using just (the un-secure) TELNET protocol and telnet.ListenAndServe may be OK. If you are not sure which to use, use TELNETS and ListenAndServeTLS. The previous 2 exaple servers were very very simple. Specifically, they just echoed back whatever you submitted to it. If you typed: ... it would send back: (Exactly the same data you sent it.) A more useful TELNET server can be made using the "github.com/reiver/go-telnet/telsh" sub-package. The `telsh` sub-package provides "middleware" that enables you to create a "shell" interface (also called a "command line interface" or "CLI") which most people would expect when using TELNET OR TELNETS. For example: Note that in the example, so far, we have registered 2 commands: `date` and `animate`. For this to actually work, we need to have code for the `date` and `animate` commands. The actual implemenation for the `date` command could be done like the following: Note that your "real" work is in the `dateHandlerFunc` func. And the actual implementation for the `animate` command could be done as follows: Again, note that your "real" work is in the `animateHandlerFunc` func. If you are using the telnet.ListenAndServeTLS func or the telnet.Server.ListenAndServeTLS method, you will need to supply "cert.pem" and "key.pem" files. If you do not already have these files, the Go soure code contains a tool for generating these files for you. It can be found at: So, for example, if your `$GOROOT` is the "/usr/local/go" directory, then it would be at: If you run the command: ... then you get the help information for "generate_cert.go". Of course, you would replace or set `$GOROOT` with whatever your path actually is. Again, for example, if your `$GOROOT` is the "/usr/local/go" directory, then it would be: To demonstrate the usage of "generate_cert.go", you might run the following to generate certificates that were bound to the hosts `127.0.0.1` and `localhost`: If you are not sure where "generate_cert.go" is on your computer, on Linux and Unix based systems, you might be able to find the file with the command: (If it finds it, it should output the full path to this file.) You can make a simple (un-secure) TELNET client with code like the following: You can make a simple (secure) TELNETS client with code like the following: The TELNET protocol is best known for providing a means of connecting to a remote computer, using a (text-based) shell interface, and being able to interact with it, (more or less) as if you were sitting at that computer. (Shells are also known as command-line interfaces or CLIs.) Although this was the original usage of the TELNET protocol, it can be (and is) used for other purposes as well. The TELNET protocol came from an era in computing when text-based shell interface where the common way of interacting with computers. The common interface for computers during this era was a keyboard and a monochromatic (i.e., single color) text-based monitors called "video terminals". (The word "video" in that era of computing did not refer to things such as movies. But instead was meant to contrast it with paper. In particular, the teletype machines, which were typewriter like devices that had a keyboard, but instead of having a monitor had paper that was printed onto.) In that era, in the early days of office computers, it was rare that an individual would have a computer at their desk. (A single computer was much too expensive.) Instead, there would be a single central computer that everyone would share. The style of computer used (for the single central shared computer) was called a "mainframe". What individuals would have at their desks, instead of their own compuer, would be some type of video terminal. The different types of video terminals had named such as: • VT52 • VT100 • VT220 • VT240 ("VT" in those named was short for "video terminal".) To understand this era, we need to go back a bit in time to what came before it: teletypes. Terminal codes (also sometimes called 'terminal control codes') are used to issue various kinds of commands to the terminal. (Note that 'terminal control codes' are a completely separate concept for 'TELNET commands', and the two should NOT be conflated or confused.) The most common types of 'terminal codes' are the 'ANSI escape codes'. (Although there are other types too.) ANSI escape codes (also sometimes called 'ANSI escape sequences') are a common type of 'terminal code' used to do things such as: • moving the cursor, • erasing the display, • erasing the line, • setting the graphics mode, • setting the foregroup color, • setting the background color, • setting the screen resolution, and • setting keyboard strings. One of the abilities of ANSI escape codes is to set the foreground color. Here is a table showing codes for this: (Note that in the `[]byte` that the first `byte` is the number `27` (which is the "escape" character) where the third and fouth characters are the **not** number literals, but instead character literals `'3'` and whatever.) Another of the abilities of ANSI escape codes is to set the background color. (Note that in the `[]byte` that the first `byte` is the number `27` (which is the "escape" character) where the third and fouth characters are the **not** number literals, but instead character literals `'4'` and whatever.) In Go code, if I wanted to use an ANSI escape code to use a blue background, a white foreground, and bold, I could do that with the ANSI escape code: Note that that start with byte value 27, which we have encoded as hexadecimal as \x1b. Followed by the '[' character. Coming after that is the sub-string "44", which is the code that sets our background color to blue. We follow that with the ';' character (which separates codes). And the after that comes the sub-string "37", which is the code that set our foreground color to white. After that, we follow with another ";" character (which, again, separates codes). And then we follow it the sub-string "1", which is the code that makes things bold. And finally, the ANSI escape sequence is finished off with the 'm' character. To show this in a more complete example, our `dateHandlerFunc` from before could incorporate ANSI escape sequences as follows: Note that in that example, in addition to using the ANSI escape sequence "\x1b[44;37;1m" to set the background color to blue, set the foreground color to white, and make it bold, we also used the ANSI escape sequence "\x1b[0m" to reset the background and foreground colors and boldness back to "normal".

v0.0.0-20180421082511-9ff0b2ab096e • 7 years ago

github.com/oracle/oci-go-sdk/v36

This is the official Go SDK for Oracle Cloud Infrastructure Refer to https://github.com/oracle/oci-go-sdk/blob/master/README.md#installing for installation instructions. Refer to https://github.com/oracle/oci-go-sdk/blob/master/README.md#configuring for configuration instructions. The following example shows how to get started with the SDK. The example belows creates an identityClient struct with the default configuration. It then utilizes the identityClient to list availability domains and prints them out to stdout More examples can be found in the SDK Github repo: https://github.com/oracle/oci-go-sdk/tree/master/example Optional fields are represented with the `mandatory:"false"` tag on input structs. The SDK will omit all optional fields that are nil when making requests. In the case of enum-type fields, the SDK will omit fields whose value is an empty string. The SDK uses pointers for primitive types in many input structs. To aid in the construction of such structs, the SDK provides functions that return a pointer for a given value. For example: The SDK exposes functionality that allows the user to customize any http request before is sent to the service. You can do so by setting the `Interceptor` field in any of the `Client` structs. For example: The Interceptor closure gets called before the signing process, thus any changes done to the request will be properly signed and submitted to the service. The SDK exposes a stand-alone signer that can be used to signing custom requests. Related code can be found here: https://github.com/oracle/oci-go-sdk/blob/master/common/http_signer.go. The example below shows how to create a default signer. The signer also allows more granular control on the headers used for signing. For example: You can combine a custom signer with the exposed clients in the SDK. This allows you to add custom signed headers to the request. Following is an example: Bear in mind that some services have a white list of headers that it expects to be signed. Therefore, adding an arbitrary header can result in authentications errors. To see a runnable example, see https://github.com/oracle/oci-go-sdk/blob/master/example/example_identity_test.go For more information on the signing algorithm refer to: https://docs.cloud.oracle.com/Content/API/Concepts/signingrequests.htm Some operations accept or return polymorphic JSON objects. The SDK models such objects as interfaces. Further the SDK provides structs that implement such interfaces. Thus, for all operations that expect interfaces as input, pass the struct in the SDK that satisfies such interface. For example: In the case of a polymorphic response you can type assert the interface to the expected type. For example: An example of polymorphic JSON request handling can be found here: https://github.com/oracle/oci-go-sdk/blob/master/example/example_core_test.go#L63 When calling a list operation, the operation will retrieve a page of results. To retrieve more data, call the list operation again, passing in the value of the most recent response's OpcNextPage as the value of Page in the next list operation call. When there is no more data the OpcNextPage field will be nil. An example of pagination using this logic can be found here: https://github.com/oracle/oci-go-sdk/blob/master/example/example_core_pagination_test.go The SDK has a built-in logging mechanism used internally. The internal logging logic is used to record the raw http requests, responses and potential errors when (un)marshalling request and responses. Built-in logging in the SDK is controlled via the environment variable "OCI_GO_SDK_DEBUG" and its contents. The below are possible values for the "OCI_GO_SDK_DEBUG" variable 1. "info" or "i" enables all info logging messages 2. "debug" or "d" enables all debug and info logging messages 3. "verbose" or "v" or "1" enables all verbose, debug and info logging messages 4. "null" turns all logging messages off. If the value of the environment variable does not match any of the above then default logging level is "info". If the environment variable is not present then no logging messages are emitted. The default destination for logging is Stderr and if you want to output log to a file you can set via environment variable "OCI_GO_SDK_LOG_OUTPUT_MODE". The below are possible values 1. "file" or "f" enables all logging output saved to file 2. "combine" or "c" enables all logging output to both stderr and file You can also customize the log file location and name via "OCI_GO_SDK_LOG_FILE" environment variable, the value should be the path to a specific file If this environment variable is not present, the default location will be the project root path Sometimes you may need to wait until an attribute of a resource, such as an instance or a VCN, reaches a certain state. An example of this would be launching an instance and then waiting for the instance to become available, or waiting until a subnet in a VCN has been terminated. You might also want to retry the same operation again if there's network issue etc... This can be accomplished by using the RequestMetadata.RetryPolicy. You can find the examples here: https://github.com/oracle/oci-go-sdk/blob/master/example/example_retry_test.go The GO SDK uses the net/http package to make calls to OCI services. If your environment requires you to use a proxy server for outgoing HTTP requests then you can set this up in the following ways: 1. Configuring environment variable as described here https://golang.org/pkg/net/http/#ProxyFromEnvironment 2. Modifying the underlying Transport struct for a service client In order to modify the underlying Transport struct in HttpClient, you can do something similar to (sample code for audit service client): The Object Storage service supports multipart uploads to make large object uploads easier by splitting the large object into parts. The Go SDK supports raw multipart upload operations for advanced use cases, as well as a higher level upload class that uses the multipart upload APIs. For links to the APIs used for multipart upload operations, see Managing Multipart Uploads (https://docs.cloud.oracle.com/iaas/Content/Object/Tasks/usingmultipartuploads.htm). Higher level multipart uploads are implemented using the UploadManager, which will: split a large object into parts for you, upload the parts in parallel, and then recombine and commit the parts as a single object in storage. This code sample shows how to use the UploadManager to automatically split an object into parts for upload to simplify interaction with the Object Storage service: https://github.com/oracle/oci-go-sdk/blob/master/example/example_objectstorage_test.go Some response fields are enum-typed. In the future, individual services may return values not covered by existing enums for that field. To address this possibility, every enum-type response field is a modeled as a type that supports any string. Thus if a service returns a value that is not recognized by your version of the SDK, then the response field will be set to this value. When individual services return a polymorphic JSON response not available as a concrete struct, the SDK will return an implementation that only satisfies the interface modeling the polymorphic JSON response. If you are using a version of the SDK released prior to the announcement of a new region, you may need to use a workaround to reach it, depending on whether the region is in the oraclecloud.com realm. A region is a localized geographic area. For more information on regions and how to identify them, see Regions and Availability Domains(https://docs.cloud.oracle.com/iaas/Content/General/Concepts/regions.htm). A realm is a set of regions that share entities. You can identify your realm by looking at the domain name at the end of the network address. For example, the realm for xyz.abc.123.oraclecloud.com is oraclecloud.com. oraclecloud.com Realm: For regions in the oraclecloud.com realm, even if common.Region does not contain the new region, the forward compatibility of the SDK can automatically handle it. You can pass new region names just as you would pass ones that are already defined. For more information on passing region names in the configuration, see Configuring (https://github.com/oracle/oci-go-sdk/blob/master/README.md#configuring). For details on common.Region, see (https://github.com/oracle/oci-go-sdk/blob/master/common/common.go). Other Realms: For regions in realms other than oraclecloud.com, you can use the following workarounds to reach new regions with earlier versions of the SDK. NOTE: Be sure to supply the appropriate endpoints for your region. You can overwrite the target host with client.Host: If you are authenticating via instance principals, you can set the authentication endpoint in an environment variable: Got a fix for a bug, or a new feature you'd like to contribute? The SDK is open source and accepting pull requests on GitHub https://github.com/oracle/oci-go-sdk Licensing information available at: https://github.com/oracle/oci-go-sdk/blob/master/LICENSE.txt To be notified when a new version of the Go SDK is released, subscribe to the following feed: https://github.com/oracle/oci-go-sdk/releases.atom Please refer to this link: https://github.com/oracle/oci-go-sdk#help

v36.2.0 • 4 years ago

github.com/phpdave11/gofpdf

Package gofpdf implements a PDF document generator with high level support for text, drawing and images. - UTF-8 support - Choice of measurement unit, page format and margins - Page header and footer management - Automatic page breaks, line breaks, and text justification - Inclusion of JPEG, PNG, GIF, TIFF and basic path-only SVG images - Colors, gradients and alpha channel transparency - Outline bookmarks - Internal and external links - TrueType, Type1 and encoding support - Page compression - Lines, Bézier curves, arcs, and ellipses - Rotation, scaling, skewing, translation, and mirroring - Clipping - Document protection - Layers - Templates - Barcodes - Charting facility - Import PDFs as templates gofpdf has no dependencies other than the Go standard library. All tests pass on Linux, Mac and Windows platforms. gofpdf supports UTF-8 TrueType fonts and “right-to-left” languages. Note that Chinese, Japanese, and Korean characters may not be included in many general purpose fonts. For these languages, a specialized font (for example, NotoSansSC for simplified Chinese) can be used. Also, support is provided to automatically translate UTF-8 runes to code page encodings for languages that have fewer than 256 glyphs. This repository will not be maintained, at least for some unknown duration. But it is hoped that gofpdf has a bright future in the open source world. Due to Go’s promise of compatibility, gofpdf should continue to function without modification for a longer time than would be the case with many other languages. Forks should be based on the last viable commit. Tools such as active-forks can be used to select a fork that looks promising for your needs. If a particular fork looks like it has taken the lead in attracting followers, this README will be updated to point people in that direction. The efforts of all contributors to this project have been deeply appreciated. Best wishes to all of you. To install the package on your system, run Later, to receive updates, run The following Go code generates a simple PDF file. See the functions in the fpdf_test.go file (shown as examples in this documentation) for more advanced PDF examples. If an error occurs in an Fpdf method, an internal error field is set. After this occurs, Fpdf method calls typically return without performing any operations and the error state is retained. This error management scheme facilitates PDF generation since individual method calls do not need to be examined for failure; it is generally sufficient to wait until after Output() is called. For the same reason, if an error occurs in the calling application during PDF generation, it may be desirable for the application to transfer the error to the Fpdf instance by calling the SetError() method or the SetErrorf() method. At any time during the life cycle of the Fpdf instance, the error state can be determined with a call to Ok() or Err(). The error itself can be retrieved with a call to Error(). This package is a relatively straightforward translation from the original FPDF library written in PHP (despite the caveat in the introduction to Effective Go). The API names have been retained even though the Go idiom would suggest otherwise (for example, pdf.GetX() is used rather than simply pdf.X()). The similarity of the two libraries makes the original FPDF website a good source of information. It includes a forum and FAQ. However, some internal changes have been made. Page content is built up using buffers (of type bytes.Buffer) rather than repeated string concatenation. Errors are handled as explained above rather than panicking. Output is generated through an interface of type io.Writer or io.WriteCloser. A number of the original PHP methods behave differently based on the type of the arguments that are passed to them; in these cases additional methods have been exported to provide similar functionality. Font definition files are produced in JSON rather than PHP. A side effect of running go test ./... is the production of a number of example PDFs. These can be found in the gofpdf/pdf directory after the tests complete. Please note that these examples run in the context of a test. In order run an example as a standalone application, you’ll need to examine fpdf_test.go for some helper routines, for example exampleFilename() and summary(). Example PDFs can be compared with reference copies in order to verify that they have been generated as expected. This comparison will be performed if a PDF with the same name as the example PDF is placed in the gofpdf/pdf/reference directory and if the third argument to ComparePDFFiles() in internal/example/example.go is true. (By default it is false.) The routine that summarizes an example will look for this file and, if found, will call ComparePDFFiles() to check the example PDF for equality with its reference PDF. If differences exist between the two files they will be printed to standard output and the test will fail. If the reference file is missing, the comparison is considered to succeed. In order to successfully compare two PDFs, the placement of internal resources must be consistent and the internal creation timestamps must be the same. To do this, the methods SetCatalogSort() and SetCreationDate() need to be called for both files. This is done automatically for all examples. Nothing special is required to use the standard PDF fonts (courier, helvetica, times, zapfdingbats) in your documents other than calling SetFont(). You should use AddUTF8Font() or AddUTF8FontFromBytes() to add a TrueType UTF-8 encoded font. Use RTL() and LTR() methods switch between “right-to-left” and “left-to-right” mode. In order to use a different non-UTF-8 TrueType or Type1 font, you will need to generate a font definition file and, if the font will be embedded into PDFs, a compressed version of the font file. This is done by calling the MakeFont function or using the included makefont command line utility. To create the utility, cd into the makefont subdirectory and run “go build”. This will produce a standalone executable named makefont. Select the appropriate encoding file from the font subdirectory and run the command as in the following example. In your PDF generation code, call AddFont() to load the font and, as with the standard fonts, SetFont() to begin using it. Most examples, including the package example, demonstrate this method. Good sources of free, open-source fonts include Google Fonts and DejaVu Fonts. The draw2d package is a two dimensional vector graphics library that can generate output in different forms. It uses gofpdf for its document production mode. gofpdf is a global community effort and you are invited to make it even better. If you have implemented a new feature or corrected a problem, please consider contributing your change to the project. A contribution that does not directly pertain to the core functionality of gofpdf should be placed in its own directory directly beneath the contrib directory. Here are guidelines for making submissions. Your change should - be compatible with the MIT License - be properly documented - be formatted with go fmt - include an example in fpdf_test.go if appropriate - conform to the standards of golint and go vet, that is, golint . and go vet . should not generate any warnings - not diminish test coverage Pull requests are the preferred means of accepting your changes. gofpdf is released under the MIT License. It is copyrighted by Kurt Jung and the contributors acknowledged below. This package’s code and documentation are closely derived from the FPDF library created by Olivier Plathey, and a number of font and image resources are copied directly from it. Bruno Michel has provided valuable assistance with the code. Drawing support is adapted from the FPDF geometric figures script by David Hernández Sanz. Transparency support is adapted from the FPDF transparency script by Martin Hall-May. Support for gradients and clipping is adapted from FPDF scripts by Andreas Würmser. Support for outline bookmarks is adapted from Olivier Plathey by Manuel Cornes. Layer support is adapted from Olivier Plathey. Support for transformations is adapted from the FPDF transformation script by Moritz Wagner and Andreas Würmser. PDF protection is adapted from the work of Klemen Vodopivec for the FPDF product. Lawrence Kesteloot provided code to allow an image’s extent to be determined prior to placement. Support for vertical alignment within a cell was provided by Stefan Schroeder. Ivan Daniluk generalized the font and image loading code to use the Reader interface while maintaining backward compatibility. Anthony Starks provided code for the Polygon function. Robert Lillack provided the Beziergon function and corrected some naming issues with the internal curve function. Claudio Felber provided implementations for dashed line drawing and generalized font loading. Stani Michiels provided support for multi-segment path drawing with smooth line joins, line join styles, enhanced fill modes, and has helped greatly with package presentation and tests. Templating is adapted by Marcus Downing from the FPDF_Tpl library created by Jan Slabon and Setasign. Jelmer Snoeck contributed packages that generate a variety of barcodes and help with registering images on the web. Jelmer Snoek and Guillermo Pascual augmented the basic HTML functionality with aligned text. Kent Quirk implemented backwards-compatible support for reading DPI from images that support it, and for setting DPI manually and then having it properly taken into account when calculating image size. Paulo Coutinho provided support for static embedded fonts. Dan Meyers added support for embedded JavaScript. David Fish added a generic alias-replacement function to enable, among other things, table of contents functionality. Andy Bakun identified and corrected a problem in which the internal catalogs were not sorted stably. Paul Montag added encoding and decoding functionality for templates, including images that are embedded in templates; this allows templates to be stored independently of gofpdf. Paul also added support for page boxes used in printing PDF documents. Wojciech Matusiak added supported for word spacing. Artem Korotkiy added support of UTF-8 fonts. Dave Barnes added support for imported objects and templates. Brigham Thompson added support for rounded rectangles. Joe Westcott added underline functionality and optimized image storage. Benoit KUGLER contributed support for rectangles with corners of unequal radius, modification times, and for file attachments and annotations. - Remove all legacy code page font support; use UTF-8 exclusively - Improve test coverage as reported by the coverage tool. Example demonstrates the generation of a simple PDF document. Note that since only core fonts are used (in this case Arial, a synonym for Helvetica), an empty string can be specified for the font directory in the call to New(). Note also that the example.Filename() and example.Summary() functions belong to a separate, internal package and are not part of the gofpdf library. If an error occurs at some point during the construction of the document, subsequent method calls exit immediately and the error is finally retrieved with the output call where it can be handled by the application.

v1.4.2 • 5 years ago

github.com/biogo/biogo

bíogo is a bioinformatics library for the Go language. It is a work in progress. bíogo stems from the need to address the size and structure of modern genomic and metagenomic data sets. These properties enforce requirements on the libraries and languages used for analysis: In addition to the computational burden of massive data set sizes in modern genomics there is an increasing need for complex pipelines to resolve questions in tightening problem space and also a developing need to be able to develop new algorithms to allow novel approaches to interesting questions. These issues suggest the need for a simplicity in syntax to facilitate: Related to the second issue is the reluctance of some researchers to release code because of quality concerns http://www.nature.com/news/2010/101013/full/467753a.html The issue of code release is the first of the principles formalised in the Science Code Manifesto http://sciencecodemanifesto.org/ A language with a simple, yet expressive, syntax should facilitate development of higher quality code and thus help reduce this barrier to research code release. It seems that nearly every language has it own bioinformatics library, some of which are very mature, for example BioPerl and BioPython. Why add another one? The different libraries excel in different fields, acting as scripting glue for applications in a pipeline (much of [1-3]) and interacting with external hosts [1, 2, 4, 5], wrapping lower level high performance languages with more user friendly syntax [1-4] or providing bioinformatics functions for high performance languages [5, 6]. The intended niche for bíogo lies somewhere between the scripting libraries and high performance language libraries in being easy to use for both small and large projects while having reasonable performance with computationally intensive tasks. The intent is to reduce the level of investment required to develop new research software for computationally intensive tasks. The bíogo library structure is influenced both by the structure of BioPerl and the Go core libraries. The coding style should be aligned with normal Go idioms as represented in the Go core libraries. Position numbering in the bíogo library conforms to the zero-based indexing of Go and range indexing conforms to Go's half-open zero-based slice indexing. This is at odds with the 'normal' inclusive indexing used by molecular biologists. This choice was made to avoid inconsistent indexing spaces being used — one-based inclusive for bíogo functions and methods and zero-based for native Go slices and arrays — and so avoid errors that this would otherwise facilitate. Note that the GFF package does allow, and defaults to, one-based inclusive indexing in its input and output of GFF files. Quality scores are supported for all sequence types, including protein. Phred and Solexa scoring systems are able to be read from files, however internal representation of quality scores is with Phred, so there will be precision loss in conversion. A Solexa quality score type is provided for use where this will be a problem. Copyright ©2011-2012 The bíogo Authors except where otherwise noted. All rights reserved. Use of this source code is governed by a BSD-style license that can be found in the LICENSE file.

v1.0.4 • 3 years ago

github.com/johnnadratowski/golang-neo4j-bolt-driver

Package golangNeo4jBoltDriver implements a driver for the Neo4J Bolt Protocol. The driver is compatible with Golang's sql.driver interface, but aims to implement a more complete featureset in line with what Neo4J and Bolt provides. As such, there are multiple interfaces the user can choose from. It's highly recommended that the user use the Neo4J-specific interfaces as they are more flexible and efficient than the provided sql.driver compatible methods. The interface tries to be consistent throughout. The sql.driver interfaces are standard, but the Neo4J-specific ones contain a naming convention of either "Neo" or "Pipeline". The "Neo" ones are the basic interfaces for making queries to Neo4j and it's expected that these would be used the most. The "Pipeline" ones are to support Bolt's pipelining features. Pipelines allow the user to send Neo4j many queries at once and have them executed by the database concurrently. This is useful if you have a bunch of queries that aren't necessarily dependant on one another, and you want to get better performance. The internal APIs will also pipeline statements where it is able to reliably do so, but by manually using the pipelining feature you can maximize your throughput. The API provides connection pooling using the `NewDriverPool` method. This allows you to pass it the maximum number of open connections to be used in the pool. Once this limit is hit, any new clients will have to wait for a connection to become available again. The sql driver is registered as "neo4j-bolt". The sql.driver interface is much more limited than what bolt and neo4j supports. In some cases, concessions were made in order to make that interface work with the neo4j way of doing things. The main instance of this is the marshalling of objects to/from the sql.driver.Value interface. In order to support object types that aren't supported by this interface, the internal encoding package is used to marshal these objects to byte strings. This ultimately makes for a less efficient and more 'clunky' implementation. A glaring instance of this is passing parameters. Neo4j expects named parameters but the driver interface can only really support positional parameters. To get around this, the user must create a map[string]interface{} of their parameters and marshal it to a driver.Value using the encoding.Marshal function. Similarly, the user must unmarshal data returned from the queries using the encoding.Unmarshal function, then use type assertions to retrieve the proper type. In most cases the driver will return the data from neo as the proper go-specific types. For integers they always come back as int64 and floats always come back as float64. This is for the convenience of the user and acts similarly to go's JSON interface. This prevents the user from having to use reflection to get these values. Internally, the types are always transmitted over the wire with as few bytes as possible. There are also cases where no go-specific type matches the returned values, such as when you query for a node, relationship, or path. The driver exposes specific structs which represent this data in the 'structures.graph' package. There are 4 types - Node, Relationship, UnboundRelationship, and Path. The driver returns interface{} objects which must have their types properly asserted to get the data out. There are some limitations to the types of collections the driver supports. Specifically, maps should always be of type map[string]interface{} and lists should always be of type []interface{}. It doesn't seem that the Bolt protocol supports uint64 either, so the biggest number it can send right now is the int64 max. The URL format is: `bolt://(user):(password)@(host):(port)` Schema must be `bolt`. User and password is only necessary if you are authenticating. TLS is supported by using query parameters on the connection string, like so: `bolt://host:port?tls=true&tls_no_verify=false` The supported query params are: * timeout - the number of seconds to set the connection timeout to. Defaults to 60 seconds. * tls - Set to 'true' or '1' if you want to use TLS encryption * tls_no_verify - Set to 'true' or '1' if you want to accept any server certificate (for testing, not secure) * tls_ca_cert_file - path to a custom ca cert for a self-signed TLS cert * tls_cert_file - path to a cert file for this client (need to verify this is processed by Neo4j) * tls_key_file - path to a key file for this client (need to verify this is processed by Neo4j) Errors returned from the API support wrapping, so if you receive an error from the library, it might be wrapping other errors. You can get the innermost error by using the `InnerMost` method. Failure messages from Neo4J are reported, along with their metadata, as an error. In order to get the failure message metadata from a wrapped error, you can do so by calling `err.(*errors.Error).InnerMost().(messages.FailureMessage).Metadata` If there is an error with the database connection, you should get a sql/driver ErrBadConn as per the best practice recommendations of the Golang SQL Driver. However, this error may be wrapped, so you might have to call `InnerMost` to get it, as specified above.

v0.0.0-20200323142034-807201386efa • 5 years ago

gopkg.in/rana/ora.v4

Package ora implements an Oracle database driver. ### Golang Oracle Database Driver ### #### TL;DR; just use it #### Call stored procedure with OUT parameters: An Oracle database may be accessed through the database/sql(http://golang.org/pkg/database/sql) package or through the ora package directly. database/sql offers connection pooling, thread safety, a consistent API to multiple database technologies and a common set of Go types. The ora package offers additional features including pointers, slices, nullable types, numerics of various sizes, Oracle-specific types, Go return type configuration, and Oracle abstractions such as environment, server and session. The ora package is written with the Oracle Call Interface (OCI) C-language libraries provided by Oracle. The OCI libraries are a standard for client application communication and driver communication with Oracle databases. The ora package has been verified to work with: * Oracle Standard 11g (11.2.0.4.0), Linux x86_64 (RHEL6) * Oracle Enterprise 12c (12.1.0.1.0), Windows 8.1 and AMD64. --- * [Installation](https://github.com/rana/ora#installation) * [Data Types](https://github.com/rana/ora#data-types) * [SQL Placeholder Syntax](https://github.com/rana/ora#sql-placeholder-syntax) * [Working With The Sql Package](https://github.com/rana/ora#working-with-the-sql-package) * [Working With The Oracle Package Directly](https://github.com/rana/ora#working-with-the-oracle-package-directly) * [Logging](https://github.com/rana/ora#logging) * [Test Database Setup](https://github.com/rana/ora#test-database-setup) * [Limitations](https://github.com/rana/ora#limitations) * [License](https://github.com/rana/ora#license) * [API Reference](http://godoc.org/github.com/rana/ora#pkg-index) * [Examples](./examples) --- Minimum requirements are Go 1.3 with CGO enabled, a GCC C compiler, and Oracle 11g (11.2.0.4.0) or Oracle Instant Client (11.2.0.4.0). Install Oracle or Oracle Instant Client. Copy the [oci8.pc](contrib/oci8.pc) from the `contrib` folder (or the one for your system, maybe tailored to your specific locations) to a folder in `$PKG_CONFIG_PATH` or a system folder, such as The ora package has no external Go dependencies and is available on GitHub and gopkg.in: *WARNING*: If you have Oracle Instant Client 11.2, you'll need to add "=lnnz11" to the list of linked libs! Otherwise, you may encounter "undefined reference to `nzosSCSP_SetCertSelectionParams' " errors. Oracle Instant Client 12.1 does not need this. The ora package supports all built-in Oracle data types. The supported Oracle built-in data types are NUMBER, BINARY_DOUBLE, BINARY_FLOAT, FLOAT, DATE, TIMESTAMP, TIMESTAMP WITH TIME ZONE, TIMESTAMP WITH LOCAL TIME ZONE, INTERVAL YEAR TO MONTH, INTERVAL DAY TO SECOND, CHAR, NCHAR, VARCHAR, VARCHAR2, NVARCHAR2, LONG, CLOB, NCLOB, BLOB, LONG RAW, RAW, ROWID and BFILE. SYS_REFCURSOR is also supported. Oracle does not provide a built-in boolean type. Oracle provides a single-byte character type. A common practice is to define two single-byte characters which represent true and false. The ora package adopts this approach. The oracle package associates a Go bool value to a Go rune and sends and receives the rune to a CHAR(1 BYTE) column or CHAR(1 CHAR) column. The default false rune is zero '0'. The default true rune is one '1'. The bool rune association may be configured or disabled when directly using the ora package but not with the database/sql package. Within a SQL string a placeholder may be specified to indicate where a Go variable is placed. The SQL placeholder is an Oracle identifier, from 1 to 30 characters, prefixed with a colon (:). For example: Placeholders within a SQL statement are bound by position. The actual name is not used by the ora package driver e.g., placeholder names :c1, :1, or :xyz are treated equally. The `database/sql` package provides a LastInsertId method to return the last inserted row's id. Oracle does not provide such functionality, but if you append `... RETURNING col /*LastInsertId*/` to your SQL, then it will be presented as LastInsertId. Note that you have to mark with a `/*LastInsertId*/` (case insensitive) your `RETURNING` part, to allow ora to return the last column as `LastInsertId()`. That column must fit in `int64`, though! You may access an Oracle database through the database/sql package. The database/sql package offers a consistent API across different databases, connection pooling, thread safety and a set of common Go types. database/sql makes working with Oracle straight-forward. The ora package implements interfaces in the database/sql/driver package enabling database/sql to communicate with an Oracle database. Using database/sql ensures you never have to call the ora package directly. When using database/sql, the mapping between Go types and Oracle types may be changed slightly. The database/sql package has strict expectations on Go return types. The Go-to-Oracle type mapping for database/sql is: The "ora" driver is automatically registered for use with sql.Open, but you can call ora.SetCfg to set the used configuration options including statement configuration and Rset configuration. When configuring the driver for use with database/sql, keep in mind that database/sql has strict Go type-to-Oracle type mapping expectations. The ora package allows programming with pointers, slices, nullable types, numerics of various sizes, Oracle-specific types, Go return type configuration, and Oracle abstractions such as environment, server and session. When working with the ora package directly, the API is slightly different than database/sql. When using the ora package directly, the mapping between Go types and Oracle types may be changed. The Go-to-Oracle type mapping for the ora package is: An example of using the ora package directly: Pointers may be used to capture out-bound values from a SQL statement such as an insert or stored procedure call. For example, a numeric pointer captures an identity value: A string pointer captures an out parameter from a stored procedure: Slices may be used to insert multiple records with a single insert statement: The ora package provides nullable Go types to support DML operations such as insert and select. The nullable Go types provided by the ora package are Int64, Int32, Int16, Int8, Uint64, Uint32, Uint16, Uint8, Float64, Float32, Time, IntervalYM, IntervalDS, String, Bool, Binary and Bfile. For example, you may insert nullable Strings and select nullable Strings: The `Stmt.Prep` method is variadic accepting zero or more `GoColumnType` which define a Go return type for a select-list column. For example, a Prep call can be configured to return an int64 and a nullable Int64 from the same column: Go numerics of various sizes are supported in DML operations. The ora package supports int64, int32, int16, int8, uint64, uint32, uint16, uint8, float64 and float32. For example, you may insert a uint16 and select numerics of various sizes: If a non-nullable type is defined for a nullable column returning null, the Go type's zero value is returned. GoColumnTypes defined by the ora package are: When Stmt.Prep doesn't receive a GoColumnType, or receives an incorrect GoColumnType, the default value defined in RsetCfg is used. EnvCfg, SrvCfg, SesCfg, StmtCfg and RsetCfg are the main configuration structs. EnvCfg configures aspects of an Env. SrvCfg configures aspects of a Srv. SesCfg configures aspects of a Ses. StmtCfg configures aspects of a Stmt. RsetCfg configures aspects of Rset. StmtCfg and RsetCfg have the most options to configure. RsetCfg defines the default mapping between an Oracle select-list column and a Go type. StmtCfg may be set in an EnvCfg, SrvCfg, SesCfg and StmtCfg. RsetCfg may be set in a Stmt. EnvCfg.StmtCfg, SrvCfg.StmtCfg, SesCfg.StmtCfg may optionally be specified to configure a statement. If StmtCfg isn't specified default values are applied. EnvCfg.StmtCfg, SrvCfg.StmtCfg, SesCfg.StmtCfg cascade to new descendent structs. When ora.OpenEnv() is called a specified EnvCfg is used or a default EnvCfg is created. Creating a Srv with env.OpenSrv() will use SrvCfg.StmtCfg if it is specified; otherwise, EnvCfg.StmtCfg is copied by value to SrvCfg.StmtCfg. Creating a Ses with srv.OpenSes() will use SesCfg.StmtCfg if it is specified; otherwise, SrvCfg.StmtCfg is copied by value to SesCfg.StmtCfg. Creating a Stmt with ses.Prep() will use SesCfg.StmtCfg if it is specified; otherwise, a new StmtCfg with default values is set on the Stmt. Call Stmt.Cfg() to change a Stmt's configuration. An Env may contain multiple Srv. A Srv may contain multiple Ses. A Ses may contain multiple Stmt. A Stmt may contain multiple Rset. Setting a RsetCfg on a StmtCfg does not cascade through descendent structs. Configuration of Stmt.Cfg takes effect prior to calls to Stmt.Exe and Stmt.Qry; consequently, any updates to Stmt.Cfg after a call to Stmt.Exe or Stmt.Qry are not observed. One configuration scenario may be to set a server's select statements to return nullable Go types by default: Another scenario may be to configure the runes mapped to bool values: Oracle-specific types offered by the ora package are ora.Rset, ora.IntervalYM, ora.IntervalDS, ora.Raw, ora.Lob and ora.Bfile. ora.Rset represents an Oracle SYS_REFCURSOR. ora.IntervalYM represents an Oracle INTERVAL YEAR TO MONTH. ora.IntervalDS represents an Oracle INTERVAL DAY TO SECOND. ora.Raw represents an Oracle RAW or LONG RAW. ora.Lob may represent an Oracle BLOB or Oracle CLOB. And ora.Bfile represents an Oracle BFILE. ROWID columns are returned as strings and don't have a unique Go type. #### LOBs The default for SELECTing [BC]LOB columns is a safe Bin or S, which means all the contents of the LOB is slurped into memory and returned as a []byte or string. The DefaultLOBFetchLen says LOBs are prefetched only a minimal way, to minimize extra memory usage - you can override this using `stmt.SetCfg(stmt.Cfg().SetLOBFetchLen(100))`. If you want more control, you can use ora.L in Prep, Qry or `ses.SetCfg(ses.Cfg().SetBlob(ora.L))`. But keep in mind that Oracle restricts the use of LOBs: it is forbidden to do ANYTHING while reading the LOB! No another query, no exec, no close of the Rset - even *advance* to the next record in the result set is forbidden! Failing to adhere these rules results in "Invalid handle" and ORA-03127 errors. You cannot start reading another LOB till you haven't finished reading the previous LOB, not even in the same row! Failing this results in ORA-24804! For examples, see [z_lob_test.go](z_lob_test.go). #### Rset Rset is used to obtain Go values from a SQL select statement. Methods Rset.Next, Rset.NextRow, and Rset.Len are available. Fields Rset.Row, Rset.Err, Rset.Index, and Rset.ColumnNames are also available. The Next method attempts to load data from an Oracle buffer into Row, returning true when successful. When no data is available, or if an error occurs, Next returns false setting Row to nil. Any error in Next is assigned to Err. Calling Next increments Index and method Len returns the total number of rows processed. The NextRow method is convenient for returning a single row. NextRow calls Next and returns Row. ColumnNames returns the names of columns defined by the SQL select statement. Rset has two usages. Rset may be returned from Stmt.Qry when prepared with a SQL select statement: Or, *Rset may be passed to Stmt.Exe when prepared with a stored procedure accepting an OUT SYS_REFCURSOR parameter: Stored procedures with multiple OUT SYS_REFCURSOR parameters enable a single Exe call to obtain multiple Rsets: The types of values assigned to Row may be configured in StmtCfg.Rset. For configuration to take effect, assign StmtCfg.Rset prior to calling Stmt.Qry or Stmt.Exe. Rset prefetching may be controlled by StmtCfg.PrefetchRowCount and StmtCfg.PrefetchMemorySize. PrefetchRowCount works in coordination with PrefetchMemorySize. When PrefetchRowCount is set to zero only PrefetchMemorySize is used; otherwise, the minimum of PrefetchRowCount and PrefetchMemorySize is used. The default uses a PrefetchMemorySize of 134MB. Opening and closing Rsets is managed internally. Rset does not have an Open method or Close method. IntervalYM may be be inserted and selected: IntervalDS may be be inserted and selected: Transactions on an Oracle server are supported. DML statements auto-commit unless a transaction has started: Ses.PrepAndExe, Ses.PrepAndQry, Ses.Ins, Ses.Upd, and Ses.Sel are convenient one-line methods. Ses.PrepAndExe offers a convenient one-line call to Ses.Prep and Stmt.Exe. Ses.PrepAndQry offers a convenient one-line call to Ses.Prep and Stmt.Qry. Ses.Ins composes, prepares and executes a sql INSERT statement. Ses.Ins is useful when you have to create and maintain a simple INSERT statement with a long list of columns. As table columns are added and dropped over the lifetime of a table Ses.Ins is easy to read and revise. Ses.Upd composes, prepares and executes a sql UPDATE statement. Ses.Upd is useful when you have to create and maintain a simple UPDATE statement with a long list of columns. As table columns are added and dropped over the lifetime of a table Ses.Upd is easy to read and revise. Ses.Sel composes, prepares and queries a sql SELECT statement. Ses.Sel is useful when you have to create and maintain a simple SELECT statement with a long list of columns that have non-default GoColumnTypes. As table columns are added and dropped over the lifetime of a table Ses.Sel is easy to read and revise. The Ses.Ping method checks whether the client's connection to an Oracle server is valid. A call to Ping requires an open Ses. Ping will return a nil error when the connection is fine: The Srv.Version method is available to obtain the Oracle server version. A call to Version requires an open Ses: Further code examples are available in the [example file](https://github.com/rana/ora/blob/master/z_example_test.go), test files and [samples folder](https://github.com/rana/ora/tree/master/samples). The ora package provides a simple ora.Logger interface for logging. Logging is disabled by default. Specify one of three optional built-in logging packages to enable logging; or, use your own logging package. ora.Cfg().Log offers various options to enable or disable logging of specific ora driver methods. For example: To use the standard Go log package: which produces a sample log of: Messages are prefixed with 'ORA I' for information or 'ORA E' for an error. The log package is configured to write to os.Stderr by default. Use the ora/lg.Std type to configure an alternative io.Writer. To use the glog package: which produces a sample log of: To use the log15 package: which produces a sample log of: See https://github.com/rana/ora/tree/master/samples/lg15/main.go for sample code which uses the log15 package. Tests are available and require some setup. Setup varies depending on whether the Oracle server is configured as a container database or non-container database. It's simpler to setup a non-container database. An example for each setup is explained. Non-container test database setup steps: Container test database setup steps: Some helpful SQL maintenance statements: Run the tests. database/sql method Stmt.QueryRow is not supported. Go 1.6 introduced stricter cgo (call C from Go) rules, and introduced runtime checks. This is good, as the possibility of C code corrupting Go code is almost completely eliminated, but it also means a severe call overhead grow. [Sometimes](https://groups.google.com/forum/#!topic/golang-nuts/ccMkPG6Bi5k) this can be 22x the go 1.5.3 call time! So if you need performance more than correctness, start your programs with "GODEBUG=cgocheck=0" environment setting. Copyright 2017 Rana Ian, Tamás Gulácsi. All rights reserved. Use of this source code is governed by The MIT License found in the accompanying LICENSE file.

v4.1.15 • 7 years ago

github.com/princjef/gomarkdoc

Package gomarkdoc formats documentation for one or more packages as markdown for usage outside of the main https://pkg.go.dev site. It supports custom templates for tweaking representation of documentation at fine-grained levels, exporting both exported and unexported symbols, and custom formatters for different backends. If you want to use this package as a command-line tool, you can install the command by running the following on go 1.16+: For older versions of go, you can install using the following method instead: The command line tool supports configuration for all of the features of the importable package: The gomarkdoc command processes each of the provided packages, generating documentation for the package in markdown format and writing it to console. For example, if you have a package in your current directory and want to send it to a documentation markdown file, you might do something like this: The gomarkdoc tool supports generating documentation for both local packages and remote ones. To specify a local package, start the name of the package with a period (.) or specify an absolute path on the filesystem. All other package signifiers are assumed to be remote packages. You may specify both local and remote packages in the same command invocation as separate arguments. If you have a project with many packages but you want to skip documentation generation for some, you can use the --exclude-dirs option. This will remove any matching directories from the list of directories to process. Excluded directories are specified using the same pathing syntax as the packages to process. Multiple expressions may be comma-separated or specified by using the --exclude-dirs flag multiple times. For example, in this repository we generate documentation for the entire project while excluding our test packages by running: By default, the documentation generated by the gomarkdoc command is sent to standard output, where it can be redirected to a file. This can be useful if you want to perform additional modifications to the documentation or send it somewhere other than a file. However, keep in mind that there are some inconsistencies in how various shells/platforms handle redirected command output (for example, Powershell encodes in UTF-16, not UTF-8). As a result, the --output option described below is recommended for most use cases. If you want to redirect output for each processed package to a file, you can provide the --output/-o option, which accepts a template specifying how to generate the path of the output file. A common usage of this option is when generating README documentation for a package with subpackages (which are supported via the ... signifier as in other parts of the golang toolchain). In addition, this option provides consistent behavior across platforms and shells: You can see all of the data available to the output template in the PackageSpec struct in the github.com/princjef/gomarkdoc/cmd/gomarkdoc package. The documentation information that is output is formatted using a series of text templates for the various components of the overall documentation which get generated. Higher level templates contain lower level templates, but any template may be replaced with an override template using the --template/-t option. The full list of templates that may be overridden are: file: generates documentation for a file containing one or more packages, depending on how the tool is configured. This is the root template for documentation generation. package: generates documentation for an entire package. type: generates documentation for a single type declaration, as well as any related functions/methods. func: generates documentation for a single function or method. It may be referenced from within a type, or directly in the package, depending on nesting. value: generates documentation for a single variable or constant declaration block within a package. index: generates an index of symbols within a package, similar to what is seen for godoc.org. The index links to types, funcs, variables, and constants generated by other templates, so it may need to be overridden as well if any of those templates are changed in a material way. example: generates documentation for a single example for a package or one of its symbols. The example is generated alongside whichever symbol it represents, based on the standard naming conventions outlined in https://blog.golang.org/examples#TOC_4. doc: generates the freeform documentation block for any of the above structures that can contain a documentation section. import: generates the import code used to pull in a package. Overriding with the --template-file option uses a key-value pair mapping a template name to the file containing the contents of the override template to use. Specified template files must exist: As with the godoc tool itself, only exported symbols will be shown in documentation. This can be expanded to include all symbols in a package by adding the --include-unexported/-u flag. If you want to blend the documentation generated by gomarkdoc with your own hand-written markdown, you can use the --embed/-e flag to change the gomarkdoc tool into an append/embed mode. When documentation is generated, gomarkdoc looks for a file in the location where the documentation is to be written and embeds the documentation if present. Otherwise, the documentation is appended to the end of the file. When running with embed mode enabled, gomarkdoc will look for either this single comment: Or the following pair of comments (in which case all content in between is replaced): If you would like to include files that are part of a build tag, you can specify build tags with the --tags flag. Tags are also supported through GOFLAGS, though command line and configuration file definitions override tags specified through GOFLAGS. You can also run gomarkdoc in a verification mode with the --check/-c flag. This is particularly useful for continuous integration when you want to make sure that a commit correctly updated the generated documentation. This flag is only supported when the --output/-o flag is specified, as the file provided there is what the tool is checking: If you're experiencing difficulty with gomarkdoc or just want to get more information about how it's executing underneath, you can add -v to show more logs. This can be chained a second time to show even more verbose logs: Some features of gomarkdoc rely on being able to detect information from the git repository containing the project. Since individual local git repositories may be configured differently from person to person, you may want to manually specify the information for the repository to remove any inconsistencies. This can be achieved with the --repository.url, --repository.default-branch and --repository.path options. For example, this repository would be configured with: If you want to reuse configuration options across multiple invocations, you can specify a file in the folder where you invoke gomarkdoc containing configuration information that you would otherwise provide on the command line. This file may be a JSON, TOML, YAML, HCL, env, or Java properties file, but the name is expected to start with .gomarkdoc (e.g. .gomarkdoc.yml). All configuration options are available with the camel-cased form of their long name (e.g. --include-unexported becomes includeUnexported). Template overrides are specified as a map, rather than a set of key-value pairs separated by =. Options provided on the command line override those provided in the configuration file if an option is present in both. While most users will find the command line utility sufficient for their needs, this package may also be used programmatically by installing it directly, rather than its command subpackage. The programmatic usage provides more flexibility when selecting what packages to work with and what components to generate documentation for. A common usage will look something like this: This project uses itself to generate the README files in github.com/princjef/gomarkdoc and its subdirectories. To see the commands that are run to generate documentation for this repository, take a look at the Doc() and DocVerify() functions in magefile.go and the .gomarkdoc.yml file in the root of this repository. To run these commands in your own project, simply replace `go run ./cmd/gomarkdoc` with `gomarkdoc`. Know of another project that is using gomarkdoc? Open an issue with a description of the project and link to the repository and it might be featured here!

v1.1.0 • last year

github.com/go-pdf/fpdf

Package fpdf implements a PDF document generator with high level support for text, drawing and images. - UTF-8 support - Choice of measurement unit, page format and margins - Page header and footer management - Automatic page breaks, line breaks, and text justification - Inclusion of JPEG, PNG, GIF, TIFF and basic path-only SVG images - Colors, gradients and alpha channel transparency - Outline bookmarks - Internal and external links - TrueType, Type1 and encoding support - Page compression - Lines, Bézier curves, arcs, and ellipses - Rotation, scaling, skewing, translation, and mirroring - Clipping - Document protection - Layers - Templates - Barcodes - Charting facility - Import PDFs as templates go-pdf/fpdf has no dependencies other than the Go standard library. All tests pass on Linux, Mac and Windows platforms. go-pdf/fpdf supports UTF-8 TrueType fonts and “right-to-left” languages. Note that Chinese, Japanese, and Korean characters may not be included in many general purpose fonts. For these languages, a specialized font (for example, NotoSansSC for simplified Chinese) can be used. Also, support is provided to automatically translate UTF-8 runes to code page encodings for languages that have fewer than 256 glyphs. To install the package on your system, run Later, to receive updates, run The following Go code generates a simple PDF file. See the functions in the fpdf_test.go file (shown as examples in this documentation) for more advanced PDF examples. If an error occurs in an Fpdf method, an internal error field is set. After this occurs, Fpdf method calls typically return without performing any operations and the error state is retained. This error management scheme facilitates PDF generation since individual method calls do not need to be examined for failure; it is generally sufficient to wait until after Output() is called. For the same reason, if an error occurs in the calling application during PDF generation, it may be desirable for the application to transfer the error to the Fpdf instance by calling the SetError() method or the SetErrorf() method. At any time during the life cycle of the Fpdf instance, the error state can be determined with a call to Ok() or Err(). The error itself can be retrieved with a call to Error(). This package is a relatively straightforward translation from the original FPDF library written in PHP (despite the caveat in the introduction to Effective Go). The API names have been retained even though the Go idiom would suggest otherwise (for example, pdf.GetX() is used rather than simply pdf.X()). The similarity of the two libraries makes the original FPDF website a good source of information. It includes a forum and FAQ. However, some internal changes have been made. Page content is built up using buffers (of type bytes.Buffer) rather than repeated string concatenation. Errors are handled as explained above rather than panicking. Output is generated through an interface of type io.Writer or io.WriteCloser. A number of the original PHP methods behave differently based on the type of the arguments that are passed to them; in these cases additional methods have been exported to provide similar functionality. Font definition files are produced in JSON rather than PHP. A side effect of running go test ./... is the production of a number of example PDFs. These can be found in the go-pdf/fpdf/pdf directory after the tests complete. Please note that these examples run in the context of a test. In order run an example as a standalone application, you’ll need to examine fpdf_test.go for some helper routines, for example exampleFilename() and summary(). Example PDFs can be compared with reference copies in order to verify that they have been generated as expected. This comparison will be performed if a PDF with the same name as the example PDF is placed in the go-pdf/fpdf/pdf/reference directory and if the third argument to ComparePDFFiles() in internal/example/example.go is true. (By default it is false.) The routine that summarizes an example will look for this file and, if found, will call ComparePDFFiles() to check the example PDF for equality with its reference PDF. If differences exist between the two files they will be printed to standard output and the test will fail. If the reference file is missing, the comparison is considered to succeed. In order to successfully compare two PDFs, the placement of internal resources must be consistent and the internal creation timestamps must be the same. To do this, the methods SetCatalogSort() and SetCreationDate() need to be called for both files. This is done automatically for all examples. Nothing special is required to use the standard PDF fonts (courier, helvetica, times, zapfdingbats) in your documents other than calling SetFont(). You should use AddUTF8Font() or AddUTF8FontFromBytes() to add a TrueType UTF-8 encoded font. Use RTL() and LTR() methods switch between “right-to-left” and “left-to-right” mode. In order to use a different non-UTF-8 TrueType or Type1 font, you will need to generate a font definition file and, if the font will be embedded into PDFs, a compressed version of the font file. This is done by calling the MakeFont function or using the included makefont command line utility. To create the utility, cd into the makefont subdirectory and run “go build”. This will produce a standalone executable named makefont. Select the appropriate encoding file from the font subdirectory and run the command as in the following example. In your PDF generation code, call AddFont() to load the font and, as with the standard fonts, SetFont() to begin using it. Most examples, including the package example, demonstrate this method. Good sources of free, open-source fonts include Google Fonts and DejaVu Fonts. The draw2d package is a two dimensional vector graphics library that can generate output in different forms. It uses gofpdf for its document production mode. gofpdf is a global community effort and you are invited to make it even better. If you have implemented a new feature or corrected a problem, please consider contributing your change to the project. A contribution that does not directly pertain to the core functionality of gofpdf should be placed in its own directory directly beneath the contrib directory. Here are guidelines for making submissions. Your change should - be compatible with the MIT License - be properly documented - be formatted with go fmt - include an example in fpdf_test.go if appropriate - conform to the standards of golint and go vet, that is, golint . and go vet . should not generate any warnings - not diminish test coverage Pull requests are the preferred means of accepting your changes. gofpdf is released under the MIT License. It is copyrighted by Kurt Jung and the contributors acknowledged below. This package’s code and documentation are closely derived from the FPDF library created by Olivier Plathey, and a number of font and image resources are copied directly from it. Bruno Michel has provided valuable assistance with the code. Drawing support is adapted from the FPDF geometric figures script by David Hernández Sanz. Transparency support is adapted from the FPDF transparency script by Martin Hall-May. Support for gradients and clipping is adapted from FPDF scripts by Andreas Würmser. Support for outline bookmarks is adapted from Olivier Plathey by Manuel Cornes. Layer support is adapted from Olivier Plathey. Support for transformations is adapted from the FPDF transformation script by Moritz Wagner and Andreas Würmser. PDF protection is adapted from the work of Klemen Vodopivec for the FPDF product. Lawrence Kesteloot provided code to allow an image’s extent to be determined prior to placement. Support for vertical alignment within a cell was provided by Stefan Schroeder. Ivan Daniluk generalized the font and image loading code to use the Reader interface while maintaining backward compatibility. Anthony Starks provided code for the Polygon function. Robert Lillack provided the Beziergon function and corrected some naming issues with the internal curve function. Claudio Felber provided implementations for dashed line drawing and generalized font loading. Stani Michiels provided support for multi-segment path drawing with smooth line joins, line join styles, enhanced fill modes, and has helped greatly with package presentation and tests. Templating is adapted by Marcus Downing from the FPDF_Tpl library created by Jan Slabon and Setasign. Jelmer Snoeck contributed packages that generate a variety of barcodes and help with registering images on the web. Jelmer Snoek and Guillermo Pascual augmented the basic HTML functionality with aligned text. Kent Quirk implemented backwards-compatible support for reading DPI from images that support it, and for setting DPI manually and then having it properly taken into account when calculating image size. Paulo Coutinho provided support for static embedded fonts. Dan Meyers added support for embedded JavaScript. David Fish added a generic alias-replacement function to enable, among other things, table of contents functionality. Andy Bakun identified and corrected a problem in which the internal catalogs were not sorted stably. Paul Montag added encoding and decoding functionality for templates, including images that are embedded in templates; this allows templates to be stored independently of gofpdf. Paul also added support for page boxes used in printing PDF documents. Wojciech Matusiak added supported for word spacing. Artem Korotkiy added support of UTF-8 fonts. Dave Barnes added support for imported objects and templates. Brigham Thompson added support for rounded rectangles. Joe Westcott added underline functionality and optimized image storage. Benoit KUGLER contributed support for rectangles with corners of unequal radius, modification times, and for file attachments and annotations. - Remove all legacy code page font support; use UTF-8 exclusively - Improve test coverage as reported by the coverage tool. Example demonstrates the generation of a simple PDF document. Note that since only core fonts are used (in this case Arial, a synonym for Helvetica), an empty string can be specified for the font directory in the call to New(). Note also that the example.Filename() and example.SummaryCompare() functions belong to a separate, internal package and are not part of the gofpdf library. If an error occurs at some point during the construction of the document, subsequent method calls exit immediately and the error is finally retrieved with the output call where it can be handled by the application.

v1.4.3 • 3 years ago

github.com/cznic/kv

Package kv implements a simple and easy to use persistent key/value (KV) store. 2016-07-11: KV now uses the stable version of lldb. (github.com/cznic/lldb). The stored KV pairs are sorted in the key collation order defined by an user supplied 'compare' function (passed as a field in Options). Keys, as well as the values associated with them, are opaque []bytes. Maximum size of a "native" key or value is 65787 bytes. Larger keys or values have to be composed of the "native" ones in client code. The maximum DB size kv can handle is 2^60 bytes (1 exabyte). See also [4]: "Block handles". Transactions are resource limited. All changes made by a transaction are held in memory until the top level transaction is committed. ACID[1] implementation notes/details follows. A successfully committed transaction appears (by its effects on the database) to be indivisible ("atomic") iff the transaction is performed in isolation. An aborted (via RollBack) transaction appears like it never happened under the same limitation. Atomic updates to the DB, via functions like Set, Inc, etc., are performed in their own automatic transaction. If the partial progress of any such function fails at any point, the automatic transaction is canceled via Rollback before returning from the function. A non nil error is returned in that case. All reads, including those made from any other concurrent non isolated transaction(s), performed during a not yet committed transaction, are dirty reads, i.e. the data returned are consistent with the in-progress state of the open transaction, or all of the open transactions. Obviously, conflicts, data races and inconsistent states can happen, but iff non isolated transactions are performed. Performing a Rollback at a nested transaction level properly returns the transaction state (and data read from the DB) to what it was before the respective BeginTransaction. Transactions of the atomic updating functions (Set, Put, Delete ...) are always isolated. Transactions controlled by BeginTransaction/Commit/RollBack, are isolated iff their execution is serialized. Transactions are committed using the two phase commit protocol(2PC)[2] and a write ahead log(WAL)[3]. DB recovery after a crash is performed automatically using data from the WAL. Last transaction data, either of an in progress transaction or a transaction being committed at the moment of the crash, can get lost. No protection from non readable files, files corrupted by other processes or by memory faults or other HW problems, is provided. Always properly backup your DB data file(s).

v0.0.0-20181122101858-e9cdcade440e • 6 years ago

storj.io/uplink

Package uplink is the main entrypoint to interacting with Storj Labs' decentralized storage network. Sign up for an account on a Satellite today! https://storj.io/ The fundamental unit of access in the Storj Labs storage network is the Access Grant. An access grant is a serialized structure that is internally comprised of an API Key, a set of encryption key information, and information about which Storj Labs or Tardigrade network Satellite is responsible for the metadata. An access grant is always associated with exactly one Project on one Satellite. If you don't already have an access grant, you will need make an account on a Satellite, generate an API Key, and encapsulate that API Key with encryption information into an access grant. If you don't already have an account on a Satellite, first make one at https://storj.io/ and note the Satellite you choose (such as us1.storj.io, eu1.storj.io, etc). Then, make an API Key in the web interface. The first step to any project is to generate a restricted access grant with the minimal permissions that are needed. Access grants contains all encryption information and they should be restricted as much as possible. To make an access grant, you can create one using our Uplink CLI tool's 'share' subcommand (after setting up the Uplink CLI tool), or you can make one as follows: In the above example, 'serializedAccess' is a human-readable string that represents read-only access to just the "logs" bucket, and is only able to decrypt that one bucket thanks to hierarchical deterministic key derivation. Note: RequestAccessWithPassphrase is CPU-intensive, and your application's normal lifecycle should avoid it and use ParseAccess where possible instead. To revoke an access grant see the Project.RevokeAccess method. A common architecture for building applications is to have a single bucket for the entire application to store the objects of all users. In such architecture, it is of utmost importance to guarantee that users can access only their objects but not the objects of other users. This can be achieved by implementing an app-specific authentication service that generates an access grant for each user by restricting the main access grant of the application. This user-specific access grant is restricted to access the objects only within a specific key prefix defined for the user. When initialized, the authentication server creates the main application access grant with an empty passphrase as follows. The authentication service does not hold any encryption information about users, so the passphrase used to request the main application access grant does not matter. The encryption keys related to user objects will be overridden in a next step on the client-side. It is important that once set to a specific value, this passphrase never changes in the future. Therefore, the best practice is to use an empty passphrase. Whenever a user is authenticated, the authentication service generates the user-specific access grant as follows: The userID is something that uniquely identifies the users in the application and must never change. Along with the user access grant, the authentication service should return a user-specific salt. The salt must be always the same for this user. The salt size is 16-byte or 32-byte. Once the application receives the user-specific access grant and the user-specific salt from the authentication service, it has to override the encryption key in the access grant, so users can encrypt and decrypt their files with encryption keys derived from their passphrase. The user-specific access grant is now ready to use by the application. Once you have a valid access grant, you can open a Project with the access that access grant allows for. Projects allow you to manage buckets and objects within buckets. A bucket represents a collection of objects. You can upload, download, list, and delete objects of any size or shape. Objects within buckets are represented by keys, where keys can optionally be listed using the "/" delimiter. Note: Objects and object keys within buckets are end-to-end encrypted, but bucket names themselves are not encrypted, so the billing interface on the Satellite can show you bucket line items. Objects support a couple kilobytes of arbitrary key/value metadata, and arbitrary-size primary data streams with the ability to read at arbitrary offsets. If you want to access only a small subrange of the data you uploaded, you can use `uplink.DownloadOptions` to specify the download range. Listing objects returns an iterator that allows to walk through all the items:

v1.13.1 • 3 months ago

github.com/oracle/oci-go-sdk/v56

This is the official Go SDK for Oracle Cloud Infrastructure Refer to https://github.com/oracle/oci-go-sdk/blob/master/README.md#installing for installation instructions. Refer to https://github.com/oracle/oci-go-sdk/blob/master/README.md#configuring for configuration instructions. The following example shows how to get started with the SDK. The example belows creates an identityClient struct with the default configuration. It then utilizes the identityClient to list availability domains and prints them out to stdout More examples can be found in the SDK Github repo: https://github.com/oracle/oci-go-sdk/tree/master/example Optional fields are represented with the `mandatory:"false"` tag on input structs. The SDK will omit all optional fields that are nil when making requests. In the case of enum-type fields, the SDK will omit fields whose value is an empty string. The SDK uses pointers for primitive types in many input structs. To aid in the construction of such structs, the SDK provides functions that return a pointer for a given value. For example: The SDK exposes functionality that allows the user to customize any http request before is sent to the service. You can do so by setting the `Interceptor` field in any of the `Client` structs. For example: The Interceptor closure gets called before the signing process, thus any changes done to the request will be properly signed and submitted to the service. The SDK exposes a stand-alone signer that can be used to signing custom requests. Related code can be found here: https://github.com/oracle/oci-go-sdk/blob/master/common/http_signer.go. The example below shows how to create a default signer. The signer also allows more granular control on the headers used for signing. For example: You can combine a custom signer with the exposed clients in the SDK. This allows you to add custom signed headers to the request. Following is an example: Bear in mind that some services have a white list of headers that it expects to be signed. Therefore, adding an arbitrary header can result in authentications errors. To see a runnable example, see https://github.com/oracle/oci-go-sdk/blob/master/example/example_identity_test.go For more information on the signing algorithm refer to: https://docs.cloud.oracle.com/Content/API/Concepts/signingrequests.htm Some operations accept or return polymorphic JSON objects. The SDK models such objects as interfaces. Further the SDK provides structs that implement such interfaces. Thus, for all operations that expect interfaces as input, pass the struct in the SDK that satisfies such interface. For example: In the case of a polymorphic response you can type assert the interface to the expected type. For example: An example of polymorphic JSON request handling can be found here: https://github.com/oracle/oci-go-sdk/blob/master/example/example_core_test.go#L63 When calling a list operation, the operation will retrieve a page of results. To retrieve more data, call the list operation again, passing in the value of the most recent response's OpcNextPage as the value of Page in the next list operation call. When there is no more data the OpcNextPage field will be nil. An example of pagination using this logic can be found here: https://github.com/oracle/oci-go-sdk/blob/master/example/example_core_pagination_test.go The SDK has a built-in logging mechanism used internally. The internal logging logic is used to record the raw http requests, responses and potential errors when (un)marshalling request and responses. Built-in logging in the SDK is controlled via the environment variable "OCI_GO_SDK_DEBUG" and its contents. The below are possible values for the "OCI_GO_SDK_DEBUG" variable 1. "info" or "i" enables all info logging messages 2. "debug" or "d" enables all debug and info logging messages 3. "verbose" or "v" or "1" enables all verbose, debug and info logging messages 4. "null" turns all logging messages off. If the value of the environment variable does not match any of the above then default logging level is "info". If the environment variable is not present then no logging messages are emitted. The default destination for logging is Stderr and if you want to output log to a file you can set via environment variable "OCI_GO_SDK_LOG_OUTPUT_MODE". The below are possible values 1. "file" or "f" enables all logging output saved to file 2. "combine" or "c" enables all logging output to both stderr and file You can also customize the log file location and name via "OCI_GO_SDK_LOG_FILE" environment variable, the value should be the path to a specific file If this environment variable is not present, the default location will be the project root path Sometimes you may need to wait until an attribute of a resource, such as an instance or a VCN, reaches a certain state. An example of this would be launching an instance and then waiting for the instance to become available, or waiting until a subnet in a VCN has been terminated. You might also want to retry the same operation again if there's network issue etc... This can be accomplished by using the RequestMetadata.RetryPolicy(request level configuration), alternatively, global(all services) or client level RetryPolicy configration is also possible. You can find the examples here: https://github.com/oracle/oci-go-sdk/blob/master/example/example_retry_test.go If you are trying to make a PUT/POST API call with binary request body, please make sure the binary request body is resettable, which means the request body should inherit Seeker interface. The Retry behavior Precedence (Highest to lowest) is defined as below:- The OCI Go SDK defines a default retry policy that retries on the errors suitable for retries (see https://docs.oracle.com/en-us/iaas/Content/API/References/apierrors.htm), for a recommended period of time (up to 7 attempts spread out over at most approximately 1.5 minutes). The default retry policy is defined by : Default Retry-able Errors Below is the list of default retry-able errors for which retry attempts should be made. The following errors should be retried (with backoff). HTTP Code Customer-facing Error Code Apart from the above errors, retries should also be attempted in the following Client Side errors : 1. HTTP Connection timeout 2. Request Connection Errors 3. Request Exceptions 4. Other timeouts (like Read Timeout) The above errors can be avoided through retrying and hence, are classified as the default retry-able errors. Additionally, retries should also be made for Circuit Breaker exceptions (Exceptions raised by Circuit Breaker in an open state) Default Termination Strategy The termination strategy defines when SDKs should stop attempting to retry. In other words, it's the deadline for retries. The OCI SDKs should stop retrying the operation after 7 retry attempts. This means the SDKs will have retried for ~98 seconds or ~1.5 minutes have elapsed due to total delays. SDKs will make a total of 8 attempts. (1 initial request + 7 retries) Default Delay Strategy Default Delay Strategy - The delay strategy defines the amount of time to wait between each of the retry attempts. The default delay strategy chosen for the SDK – Exponential backoff with jitter, using: 1. The base time to use in retry calculations will be 1 second 2. An exponent of 2. When calculating the next retry time, the SDK will raise this to the power of the number of attempts 3. A maximum wait time between calls of 30 seconds (Capped) 4. Added jitter value between 0-1000 milliseconds to spread out the requests Configure and use default retry policy You can set this retry policy for a single request: or for all requests made by a client: or for all requests made by all clients: or setting default retry via environment varaible, which is a global switch for all services: Some services enable retry for operations by default, this can be overridden using any alternatives mentioned above. To know which service operations have retries enabled by default, look at the operation's description in the SDK - it will say whether that it has retries enabled by default Some resources may have to be replicated across regions and are only eventually consistent. That means the request to create, update, or delete the resource succeeded, but the resource is not available everywhere immediately. Creating, updating, or deleting any resource in the Identity service is affected by eventual consistency, and doing so may cause other operations in other services to fail until the Identity resource has been replicated. For example, the request to CreateTag in the Identity service in the home region succeeds, but immediately using that created tag in another region in a request to LaunchInstance in the Compute service may fail. If you are creating, updating, or deleting resources in the Identity service, we recommend using an eventually consistent retry policy for any service you access. The default retry policy already deals with eventual consistency. Example: This retry policy will use a different strategy if an eventually consistent change was made in the recent past (called the "eventually consistent window", currently defined to be 4 minutes after the eventually consistent change). This special retry policy for eventual consistency will: 1. make up to 9 attempts (including the initial attempt); if an attempt is successful, no more attempts will be made 2. retry at most until (a) approximately the end of the eventually consistent window or (b) the end of the default retry period of about 1.5 minutes, whichever is farther in the future; if an attempt is successful, no more attempts will be made, and the OCI Go SDK will not wait any longer 3. retry on the error codes 400-RelatedResourceNotAuthorizedOrNotFound, 404-NotAuthorizedOrNotFound, and 409-NotAuthorizedOrResourceAlreadyExists, for which the default retry policy does not retry, in addition to the errors the default retry policy retries on (see https://docs.oracle.com/en-us/iaas/Content/API/References/apierrors.htm) If there were no eventually consistent actions within the recent past, then this special retry strategy is not used. If you want a retry policy that does not handle eventual consistency in a special way, for example because you retry on all error responses, you can use DefaultRetryPolicyWithoutEventualConsistency or NewRetryPolicyWithOptions with the common.ReplaceWithValuesFromRetryPolicy(common.DefaultRetryPolicyWithoutEventualConsistency()) option: The NewRetryPolicy function also creates a retry policy without eventual consistency. Circuit Breaker can prevent an application repeatedly trying to execute an operation that is likely to fail, allowing it to continue without waiting for the fault to be rectified or wasting CPU cycles, of course, it also enables an application to detect whether the fault has been resolved. If the problem appears to have been rectified, the application can attempt to invoke the operation. Go SDK intergrates sony/gobreaker solution, wraps in a circuit breaker object, which monitors for failures. Once the failures reach a certain threshold, the circuit breaker trips, and all further calls to the circuit breaker return with an error, this also saves the service from being overwhelmed with network calls in case of an outage. Circuit Breaker Configuration Definitions 1. Failure Rate Threshold - The state of the CircuitBreaker changes from CLOSED to OPEN when the failure rate is equal or greater than a configurable threshold. For example when more than 50% of the recorded calls have failed. 2. Reset Timeout - The timeout after which an open circuit breaker will attempt a request if a request is made 3. Failure Exceptions - The list of Exceptions that will be regarded as failures for the circuit. 4. Minimum number of calls/ Volume threshold - Configures the minimum number of calls which are required (per sliding window period) before the CircuitBreaker can calculate the error rate. 1. Failure Rate Threshold - 80% - This means when 80% of the requests calculated for a time window of 120 seconds have failed then the circuit will transition from closed to open. 2. Minimum number of calls/ Volume threshold - A value of 10, for the above defined time window of 120 seconds. 3. Reset Timeout - 30 seconds to wait before setting the breaker to halfOpen state, and trying the action again. 4. Failure Exceptions - The failures for the circuit will only be recorded for the retryable/transient exceptions. This means only the following exceptions will be regarded as failure for the circuit. HTTP Code Customer-facing Error Code Apart from the above, the following client side exceptions will also be treated as a failure for the circuit : 1. HTTP Connection timeout 2. Request Connection Errors 3. Request Exceptions 4. Other timeouts (like Read Timeout) Go SDK enable circuit breaker with default configuration for most of the service clients, if you don't want to enable the solution, can disable the functionality before your application running Go SDK also supports customize Circuit Breaker with specified configurations. You can find the examples here: https://github.com/oracle/oci-go-sdk/blob/master/example/example_circuitbreaker_test.go To know which service clients have circuit breakers enabled, look at the service client's description in the SDK - it will say whether that it has circuit breakers enabled by default The GO SDK uses the net/http package to make calls to OCI services. If your environment requires you to use a proxy server for outgoing HTTP requests then you can set this up in the following ways: 1. Configuring environment variable as described here https://golang.org/pkg/net/http/#ProxyFromEnvironment 2. Modifying the underlying Transport struct for a service client In order to modify the underlying Transport struct in HttpClient, you can do something similar to (sample code for audit service client): The Object Storage service supports multipart uploads to make large object uploads easier by splitting the large object into parts. The Go SDK supports raw multipart upload operations for advanced use cases, as well as a higher level upload class that uses the multipart upload APIs. For links to the APIs used for multipart upload operations, see Managing Multipart Uploads (https://docs.cloud.oracle.com/iaas/Content/Object/Tasks/usingmultipartuploads.htm). Higher level multipart uploads are implemented using the UploadManager, which will: split a large object into parts for you, upload the parts in parallel, and then recombine and commit the parts as a single object in storage. This code sample shows how to use the UploadManager to automatically split an object into parts for upload to simplify interaction with the Object Storage service: https://github.com/oracle/oci-go-sdk/blob/master/example/example_objectstorage_test.go Some response fields are enum-typed. In the future, individual services may return values not covered by existing enums for that field. To address this possibility, every enum-type response field is a modeled as a type that supports any string. Thus if a service returns a value that is not recognized by your version of the SDK, then the response field will be set to this value. When individual services return a polymorphic JSON response not available as a concrete struct, the SDK will return an implementation that only satisfies the interface modeling the polymorphic JSON response. If you are using a version of the SDK released prior to the announcement of a new region, you may need to use a workaround to reach it, depending on whether the region is in the oraclecloud.com realm. A region is a localized geographic area. For more information on regions and how to identify them, see Regions and Availability Domains(https://docs.cloud.oracle.com/iaas/Content/General/Concepts/regions.htm). A realm is a set of regions that share entities. You can identify your realm by looking at the domain name at the end of the network address. For example, the realm for xyz.abc.123.oraclecloud.com is oraclecloud.com. oraclecloud.com Realm: For regions in the oraclecloud.com realm, even if common.Region does not contain the new region, the forward compatibility of the SDK can automatically handle it. You can pass new region names just as you would pass ones that are already defined. For more information on passing region names in the configuration, see Configuring (https://github.com/oracle/oci-go-sdk/blob/master/README.md#configuring). For details on common.Region, see (https://github.com/oracle/oci-go-sdk/blob/master/common/common.go). Other Realms: For regions in realms other than oraclecloud.com, you can use the following workarounds to reach new regions with earlier versions of the SDK. NOTE: Be sure to supply the appropriate endpoints for your region. You can overwrite the target host with client.Host: If you are authenticating via instance principals, you can set the authentication endpoint in an environment variable: Got a fix for a bug, or a new feature you'd like to contribute? The SDK is open source and accepting pull requests on GitHub https://github.com/oracle/oci-go-sdk Licensing information available at: https://github.com/oracle/oci-go-sdk/blob/master/LICENSE.txt To be notified when a new version of the Go SDK is released, subscribe to the following feed: https://github.com/oracle/oci-go-sdk/releases.atom Please refer to this link: https://github.com/oracle/oci-go-sdk#help

v56.1.0 • 3 years ago

github.com/oracle/oci-go-sdk/v49

This is the official Go SDK for Oracle Cloud Infrastructure Refer to https://github.com/oracle/oci-go-sdk/blob/master/README.md#installing for installation instructions. Refer to https://github.com/oracle/oci-go-sdk/blob/master/README.md#configuring for configuration instructions. The following example shows how to get started with the SDK. The example belows creates an identityClient struct with the default configuration. It then utilizes the identityClient to list availability domains and prints them out to stdout More examples can be found in the SDK Github repo: https://github.com/oracle/oci-go-sdk/tree/master/example Optional fields are represented with the `mandatory:"false"` tag on input structs. The SDK will omit all optional fields that are nil when making requests. In the case of enum-type fields, the SDK will omit fields whose value is an empty string. The SDK uses pointers for primitive types in many input structs. To aid in the construction of such structs, the SDK provides functions that return a pointer for a given value. For example: The SDK exposes functionality that allows the user to customize any http request before is sent to the service. You can do so by setting the `Interceptor` field in any of the `Client` structs. For example: The Interceptor closure gets called before the signing process, thus any changes done to the request will be properly signed and submitted to the service. The SDK exposes a stand-alone signer that can be used to signing custom requests. Related code can be found here: https://github.com/oracle/oci-go-sdk/blob/master/common/http_signer.go. The example below shows how to create a default signer. The signer also allows more granular control on the headers used for signing. For example: You can combine a custom signer with the exposed clients in the SDK. This allows you to add custom signed headers to the request. Following is an example: Bear in mind that some services have a white list of headers that it expects to be signed. Therefore, adding an arbitrary header can result in authentications errors. To see a runnable example, see https://github.com/oracle/oci-go-sdk/blob/master/example/example_identity_test.go For more information on the signing algorithm refer to: https://docs.cloud.oracle.com/Content/API/Concepts/signingrequests.htm Some operations accept or return polymorphic JSON objects. The SDK models such objects as interfaces. Further the SDK provides structs that implement such interfaces. Thus, for all operations that expect interfaces as input, pass the struct in the SDK that satisfies such interface. For example: In the case of a polymorphic response you can type assert the interface to the expected type. For example: An example of polymorphic JSON request handling can be found here: https://github.com/oracle/oci-go-sdk/blob/master/example/example_core_test.go#L63 When calling a list operation, the operation will retrieve a page of results. To retrieve more data, call the list operation again, passing in the value of the most recent response's OpcNextPage as the value of Page in the next list operation call. When there is no more data the OpcNextPage field will be nil. An example of pagination using this logic can be found here: https://github.com/oracle/oci-go-sdk/blob/master/example/example_core_pagination_test.go The SDK has a built-in logging mechanism used internally. The internal logging logic is used to record the raw http requests, responses and potential errors when (un)marshalling request and responses. Built-in logging in the SDK is controlled via the environment variable "OCI_GO_SDK_DEBUG" and its contents. The below are possible values for the "OCI_GO_SDK_DEBUG" variable 1. "info" or "i" enables all info logging messages 2. "debug" or "d" enables all debug and info logging messages 3. "verbose" or "v" or "1" enables all verbose, debug and info logging messages 4. "null" turns all logging messages off. If the value of the environment variable does not match any of the above then default logging level is "info". If the environment variable is not present then no logging messages are emitted. The default destination for logging is Stderr and if you want to output log to a file you can set via environment variable "OCI_GO_SDK_LOG_OUTPUT_MODE". The below are possible values 1. "file" or "f" enables all logging output saved to file 2. "combine" or "c" enables all logging output to both stderr and file You can also customize the log file location and name via "OCI_GO_SDK_LOG_FILE" environment variable, the value should be the path to a specific file If this environment variable is not present, the default location will be the project root path Sometimes you may need to wait until an attribute of a resource, such as an instance or a VCN, reaches a certain state. An example of this would be launching an instance and then waiting for the instance to become available, or waiting until a subnet in a VCN has been terminated. You might also want to retry the same operation again if there's network issue etc... This can be accomplished by using the RequestMetadata.RetryPolicy(request level configuration), alternatively, global(all services) or client level RetryPolicy configration is also possible. You can find the examples here: https://github.com/oracle/oci-go-sdk/blob/master/example/example_retry_test.go If you are trying to make a PUT/POST API call with binary request body, please make sure the binary request body is resettable, which means the request body should inherit Seeker interface. The Retry behavior Precedence (Highest to lowest) is defined as below:- The OCI Go SDK defines a default retry policy that retries on the errors suitable for retries (see https://docs.oracle.com/en-us/iaas/Content/API/References/apierrors.htm), for a recommended period of time (up to 7 attempts spread out over at most approximately 1.5 minutes). This default retry policy can be created using: You can set this retry policy for a single request: or for all requests made by a client: or for all requests made by all clients: or setting default retry via environment varaible, which is a global switch for all services: Some services enable retry for operations by default, this can be overridden using any alternatives mentioned above. Some resources may have to be replicated across regions and are only eventually consistent. That means the request to create, update, or delete the resource succeeded, but the resource is not available everywhere immediately. Creating, updating, or deleting any resource in the Identity service is affected by eventual consistency, and doing so may cause other operations in other services to fail until the Identity resource has been replicated. For example, the request to CreateTag in the Identity service in the home region succeeds, but immediately using that created tag in another region in a request to LaunchInstance in the Compute service may fail. If you are creating, updating, or deleting resources in the Identity service, we recommend using an eventually consistent retry policy for any service you access. The default retry policy already deals with eventual consistency. Example: This retry policy will use a different strategy if an eventually consistent change was made in the recent past (called the "eventually consistent window", currently defined to be 4 minutes after the eventually consistent change). This special retry policy for eventual consistency will: 1. make up to 9 attempts (including the initial attempt); if an attempt is successful, no more attempts will be made 2. retry at most until (a) approximately the end of the eventually consistent window or (b) the end of the default retry period of about 1.5 minutes, whichever is farther in the future; if an attempt is successful, no more attempts will be made, and the OCI Go SDK will not wait any longer 3. retry on the error codes 400-RelatedResourceNotAuthorizedOrNotFound, 404-NotAuthorizedOrNotFound, and 409-NotAuthorizedOrResourceAlreadyExists, for which the default retry policy does not retry, in addition to the errors the default retry policy retries on (see https://docs.oracle.com/en-us/iaas/Content/API/References/apierrors.htm) If there were no eventually consistent actions within the recent past, then this special retry strategy is not used. If you want a retry policy that does not handle eventual consistency in a special way, for example because you retry on all error responses, you can use DefaultRetryPolicyWithoutEventualConsistency or NewRetryPolicyWithOptions with the common.ReplaceWithValuesFromRetryPolicy(common.DefaultRetryPolicyWithoutEventualConsistency()) option: The NewRetryPolicy function also creates a retry policy without eventual consistency. Circuit Breaker can prevent an application repeatedly trying to execute an operation that is likely to fail, allowing it to continue without waiting for the fault to be rectified or wasting CPU cycles, of course, it also enables an application to detect whether the fault has been resolved. If the problem appears to have been rectified, the application can attempt to invoke the operation. Go SDK intergrates sony/gobreaker solution, wraps in a circuit breaker object, which monitors for failures. Once the failures reach a certain threshold, the circuit breaker trips, and all further calls to the circuit breaker return with an error, this also saves the service from being overwhelmed with network calls in case of an outage. Go SDK enable circuit breaker with default configuration, if you don't want to enable the solution, can disable the functionality before your application running Go SDK also supports customize Circuit Breaker with specified configuratoins. You can find the examples here: https://github.com/oracle/oci-go-sdk/blob/master/example/example_circuitbreaker_test.go The GO SDK uses the net/http package to make calls to OCI services. If your environment requires you to use a proxy server for outgoing HTTP requests then you can set this up in the following ways: 1. Configuring environment variable as described here https://golang.org/pkg/net/http/#ProxyFromEnvironment 2. Modifying the underlying Transport struct for a service client In order to modify the underlying Transport struct in HttpClient, you can do something similar to (sample code for audit service client): The Object Storage service supports multipart uploads to make large object uploads easier by splitting the large object into parts. The Go SDK supports raw multipart upload operations for advanced use cases, as well as a higher level upload class that uses the multipart upload APIs. For links to the APIs used for multipart upload operations, see Managing Multipart Uploads (https://docs.cloud.oracle.com/iaas/Content/Object/Tasks/usingmultipartuploads.htm). Higher level multipart uploads are implemented using the UploadManager, which will: split a large object into parts for you, upload the parts in parallel, and then recombine and commit the parts as a single object in storage. This code sample shows how to use the UploadManager to automatically split an object into parts for upload to simplify interaction with the Object Storage service: https://github.com/oracle/oci-go-sdk/blob/master/example/example_objectstorage_test.go Some response fields are enum-typed. In the future, individual services may return values not covered by existing enums for that field. To address this possibility, every enum-type response field is a modeled as a type that supports any string. Thus if a service returns a value that is not recognized by your version of the SDK, then the response field will be set to this value. When individual services return a polymorphic JSON response not available as a concrete struct, the SDK will return an implementation that only satisfies the interface modeling the polymorphic JSON response. If you are using a version of the SDK released prior to the announcement of a new region, you may need to use a workaround to reach it, depending on whether the region is in the oraclecloud.com realm. A region is a localized geographic area. For more information on regions and how to identify them, see Regions and Availability Domains(https://docs.cloud.oracle.com/iaas/Content/General/Concepts/regions.htm). A realm is a set of regions that share entities. You can identify your realm by looking at the domain name at the end of the network address. For example, the realm for xyz.abc.123.oraclecloud.com is oraclecloud.com. oraclecloud.com Realm: For regions in the oraclecloud.com realm, even if common.Region does not contain the new region, the forward compatibility of the SDK can automatically handle it. You can pass new region names just as you would pass ones that are already defined. For more information on passing region names in the configuration, see Configuring (https://github.com/oracle/oci-go-sdk/blob/master/README.md#configuring). For details on common.Region, see (https://github.com/oracle/oci-go-sdk/blob/master/common/common.go). Other Realms: For regions in realms other than oraclecloud.com, you can use the following workarounds to reach new regions with earlier versions of the SDK. NOTE: Be sure to supply the appropriate endpoints for your region. You can overwrite the target host with client.Host: If you are authenticating via instance principals, you can set the authentication endpoint in an environment variable: Got a fix for a bug, or a new feature you'd like to contribute? The SDK is open source and accepting pull requests on GitHub https://github.com/oracle/oci-go-sdk Licensing information available at: https://github.com/oracle/oci-go-sdk/blob/master/LICENSE.txt To be notified when a new version of the Go SDK is released, subscribe to the following feed: https://github.com/oracle/oci-go-sdk/releases.atom Please refer to this link: https://github.com/oracle/oci-go-sdk#help

v49.2.0 • 3 years ago

github.com/oracle/oci-go-sdk/v32

This is the official Go SDK for Oracle Cloud Infrastructure Refer to https://github.com/oracle/oci-go-sdk/blob/master/README.md#installing for installation instructions. Refer to https://github.com/oracle/oci-go-sdk/blob/master/README.md#configuring for configuration instructions. The following example shows how to get started with the SDK. The example belows creates an identityClient struct with the default configuration. It then utilizes the identityClient to list availability domains and prints them out to stdout More examples can be found in the SDK Github repo: https://github.com/oracle/oci-go-sdk/tree/master/example Optional fields are represented with the `mandatory:"false"` tag on input structs. The SDK will omit all optional fields that are nil when making requests. In the case of enum-type fields, the SDK will omit fields whose value is an empty string. The SDK uses pointers for primitive types in many input structs. To aid in the construction of such structs, the SDK provides functions that return a pointer for a given value. For example: The SDK exposes functionality that allows the user to customize any http request before is sent to the service. You can do so by setting the `Interceptor` field in any of the `Client` structs. For example: The Interceptor closure gets called before the signing process, thus any changes done to the request will be properly signed and submitted to the service. The SDK exposes a stand-alone signer that can be used to signing custom requests. Related code can be found here: https://github.com/oracle/oci-go-sdk/blob/master/common/http_signer.go. The example below shows how to create a default signer. The signer also allows more granular control on the headers used for signing. For example: You can combine a custom signer with the exposed clients in the SDK. This allows you to add custom signed headers to the request. Following is an example: Bear in mind that some services have a white list of headers that it expects to be signed. Therefore, adding an arbitrary header can result in authentications errors. To see a runnable example, see https://github.com/oracle/oci-go-sdk/blob/master/example/example_identity_test.go For more information on the signing algorithm refer to: https://docs.cloud.oracle.com/Content/API/Concepts/signingrequests.htm Some operations accept or return polymorphic JSON objects. The SDK models such objects as interfaces. Further the SDK provides structs that implement such interfaces. Thus, for all operations that expect interfaces as input, pass the struct in the SDK that satisfies such interface. For example: In the case of a polymorphic response you can type assert the interface to the expected type. For example: An example of polymorphic JSON request handling can be found here: https://github.com/oracle/oci-go-sdk/blob/master/example/example_core_test.go#L63 When calling a list operation, the operation will retrieve a page of results. To retrieve more data, call the list operation again, passing in the value of the most recent response's OpcNextPage as the value of Page in the next list operation call. When there is no more data the OpcNextPage field will be nil. An example of pagination using this logic can be found here: https://github.com/oracle/oci-go-sdk/blob/master/example/example_core_pagination_test.go The SDK has a built-in logging mechanism used internally. The internal logging logic is used to record the raw http requests, responses and potential errors when (un)marshalling request and responses. Built-in logging in the SDK is controlled via the environment variable "OCI_GO_SDK_DEBUG" and its contents. The below are possible values for the "OCI_GO_SDK_DEBUG" variable 1. "info" or "i" enables all info logging messages 2. "debug" or "d" enables all debug and info logging messages 3. "verbose" or "v" or "1" enables all verbose, debug and info logging messages 4. "null" turns all logging messages off. If the value of the environment variable does not match any of the above then default logging level is "info". If the environment variable is not present then no logging messages are emitted. The default destination for logging is Stderr and if you want to output log to a file you can set via environment variable "OCI_GO_SDK_LOG_OUTPUT_MODE". The below are possible values 1. "file" or "f" enables all logging output saved to file 2. "combine" or "c" enables all logging output to both stderr and file You can also customize the log file location and name via "OCI_GO_SDK_LOG_FILE" environment variable, the value should be the path to a specific file If this environment variable is not present, the default location will be the project root path Sometimes you may need to wait until an attribute of a resource, such as an instance or a VCN, reaches a certain state. An example of this would be launching an instance and then waiting for the instance to become available, or waiting until a subnet in a VCN has been terminated. You might also want to retry the same operation again if there's network issue etc... This can be accomplished by using the RequestMetadata.RetryPolicy. You can find the examples here: https://github.com/oracle/oci-go-sdk/blob/master/example/example_retry_test.go The GO SDK uses the net/http package to make calls to OCI services. If your environment requires you to use a proxy server for outgoing HTTP requests then you can set this up in the following ways: 1. Configuring environment variable as described here https://golang.org/pkg/net/http/#ProxyFromEnvironment 2. Modifying the underlying Transport struct for a service client In order to modify the underlying Transport struct in HttpClient, you can do something similar to (sample code for audit service client): The Object Storage service supports multipart uploads to make large object uploads easier by splitting the large object into parts. The Go SDK supports raw multipart upload operations for advanced use cases, as well as a higher level upload class that uses the multipart upload APIs. For links to the APIs used for multipart upload operations, see Managing Multipart Uploads (https://docs.cloud.oracle.com/iaas/Content/Object/Tasks/usingmultipartuploads.htm). Higher level multipart uploads are implemented using the UploadManager, which will: split a large object into parts for you, upload the parts in parallel, and then recombine and commit the parts as a single object in storage. This code sample shows how to use the UploadManager to automatically split an object into parts for upload to simplify interaction with the Object Storage service: https://github.com/oracle/oci-go-sdk/blob/master/example/example_objectstorage_test.go Some response fields are enum-typed. In the future, individual services may return values not covered by existing enums for that field. To address this possibility, every enum-type response field is a modeled as a type that supports any string. Thus if a service returns a value that is not recognized by your version of the SDK, then the response field will be set to this value. When individual services return a polymorphic JSON response not available as a concrete struct, the SDK will return an implementation that only satisfies the interface modeling the polymorphic JSON response. If you are using a version of the SDK released prior to the announcement of a new region, you may need to use a workaround to reach it, depending on whether the region is in the oraclecloud.com realm. A region is a localized geographic area. For more information on regions and how to identify them, see Regions and Availability Domains(https://docs.cloud.oracle.com/iaas/Content/General/Concepts/regions.htm). A realm is a set of regions that share entities. You can identify your realm by looking at the domain name at the end of the network address. For example, the realm for xyz.abc.123.oraclecloud.com is oraclecloud.com. oraclecloud.com Realm: For regions in the oraclecloud.com realm, even if common.Region does not contain the new region, the forward compatibility of the SDK can automatically handle it. You can pass new region names just as you would pass ones that are already defined. For more information on passing region names in the configuration, see Configuring (https://github.com/oracle/oci-go-sdk/blob/master/README.md#configuring). For details on common.Region, see (https://github.com/oracle/oci-go-sdk/blob/master/common/common.go). Other Realms: For regions in realms other than oraclecloud.com, you can use the following workarounds to reach new regions with earlier versions of the SDK. NOTE: Be sure to supply the appropriate endpoints for your region. You can overwrite the target host with client.Host: If you are authenticating via instance principals, you can set the authentication endpoint in an environment variable: Got a fix for a bug, or a new feature you'd like to contribute? The SDK is open source and accepting pull requests on GitHub https://github.com/oracle/oci-go-sdk Licensing information available at: https://github.com/oracle/oci-go-sdk/blob/master/LICENSE.txt To be notified when a new version of the Go SDK is released, subscribe to the following feed: https://github.com/oracle/oci-go-sdk/releases.atom Please refer to this link: https://github.com/oracle/oci-go-sdk#help

v32.0.0 • 4 years ago

github.com/oracle/oci-go-sdk/v47

This is the official Go SDK for Oracle Cloud Infrastructure Refer to https://github.com/oracle/oci-go-sdk/blob/master/README.md#installing for installation instructions. Refer to https://github.com/oracle/oci-go-sdk/blob/master/README.md#configuring for configuration instructions. The following example shows how to get started with the SDK. The example belows creates an identityClient struct with the default configuration. It then utilizes the identityClient to list availability domains and prints them out to stdout More examples can be found in the SDK Github repo: https://github.com/oracle/oci-go-sdk/tree/master/example Optional fields are represented with the `mandatory:"false"` tag on input structs. The SDK will omit all optional fields that are nil when making requests. In the case of enum-type fields, the SDK will omit fields whose value is an empty string. The SDK uses pointers for primitive types in many input structs. To aid in the construction of such structs, the SDK provides functions that return a pointer for a given value. For example: The SDK exposes functionality that allows the user to customize any http request before is sent to the service. You can do so by setting the `Interceptor` field in any of the `Client` structs. For example: The Interceptor closure gets called before the signing process, thus any changes done to the request will be properly signed and submitted to the service. The SDK exposes a stand-alone signer that can be used to signing custom requests. Related code can be found here: https://github.com/oracle/oci-go-sdk/blob/master/common/http_signer.go. The example below shows how to create a default signer. The signer also allows more granular control on the headers used for signing. For example: You can combine a custom signer with the exposed clients in the SDK. This allows you to add custom signed headers to the request. Following is an example: Bear in mind that some services have a white list of headers that it expects to be signed. Therefore, adding an arbitrary header can result in authentications errors. To see a runnable example, see https://github.com/oracle/oci-go-sdk/blob/master/example/example_identity_test.go For more information on the signing algorithm refer to: https://docs.cloud.oracle.com/Content/API/Concepts/signingrequests.htm Some operations accept or return polymorphic JSON objects. The SDK models such objects as interfaces. Further the SDK provides structs that implement such interfaces. Thus, for all operations that expect interfaces as input, pass the struct in the SDK that satisfies such interface. For example: In the case of a polymorphic response you can type assert the interface to the expected type. For example: An example of polymorphic JSON request handling can be found here: https://github.com/oracle/oci-go-sdk/blob/master/example/example_core_test.go#L63 When calling a list operation, the operation will retrieve a page of results. To retrieve more data, call the list operation again, passing in the value of the most recent response's OpcNextPage as the value of Page in the next list operation call. When there is no more data the OpcNextPage field will be nil. An example of pagination using this logic can be found here: https://github.com/oracle/oci-go-sdk/blob/master/example/example_core_pagination_test.go The SDK has a built-in logging mechanism used internally. The internal logging logic is used to record the raw http requests, responses and potential errors when (un)marshalling request and responses. Built-in logging in the SDK is controlled via the environment variable "OCI_GO_SDK_DEBUG" and its contents. The below are possible values for the "OCI_GO_SDK_DEBUG" variable 1. "info" or "i" enables all info logging messages 2. "debug" or "d" enables all debug and info logging messages 3. "verbose" or "v" or "1" enables all verbose, debug and info logging messages 4. "null" turns all logging messages off. If the value of the environment variable does not match any of the above then default logging level is "info". If the environment variable is not present then no logging messages are emitted. The default destination for logging is Stderr and if you want to output log to a file you can set via environment variable "OCI_GO_SDK_LOG_OUTPUT_MODE". The below are possible values 1. "file" or "f" enables all logging output saved to file 2. "combine" or "c" enables all logging output to both stderr and file You can also customize the log file location and name via "OCI_GO_SDK_LOG_FILE" environment variable, the value should be the path to a specific file If this environment variable is not present, the default location will be the project root path Sometimes you may need to wait until an attribute of a resource, such as an instance or a VCN, reaches a certain state. An example of this would be launching an instance and then waiting for the instance to become available, or waiting until a subnet in a VCN has been terminated. You might also want to retry the same operation again if there's network issue etc... This can be accomplished by using the RequestMetadata.RetryPolicy. You can find the examples here: https://github.com/oracle/oci-go-sdk/blob/master/example/example_retry_test.go If you are trying to make a PUT/POST API call with binary request body, please make sure the binary request body is resettable, which means the request body should inherit Seeker interface. The OCI Go SDK defines a default retry policy that retries on the errors suitable for retries (see https://docs.oracle.com/en-us/iaas/Content/API/References/apierrors.htm), for a recommended period of time (up to 7 attempts spread out over at most approximately 1.5 minutes). This default retry policy can be created using: You can set this retry policy for a single request: or for all requests made by a client: Some resources may have to be replicated across regions and are only eventually consistent. That means the request to create, update, or delete the resource succeeded, but the resource is not available everywhere immediately. Creating, updating, or deleting any resource in the Identity service is affected by eventual consistency, and doing so may cause other operations in other services to fail until the Identity resource has been replicated. For example, the request to CreateTag in the Identity service in the home region succeeds, but immediately using that created tag in another region in a request to LaunchInstance in the Compute service may fail. If you are creating, updating, or deleting resources in the Identity service, we recommend using an eventually consistent retry policy for any service you access. The default retry policy already deals with eventual consistency. Example: This retry policy will use a different strategy if an eventually consistent change was made in the recent past (called the "eventually consistent window", currently defined to be 4 minutes after the eventually consistent change). This special retry policy for eventual consistency will: 1. make up to 9 attempts (including the initial attempt); if an attempt is successful, no more attempts will be made 2. retry at most until (a) approximately the end of the eventually consistent window or (b) the end of the default retry period of about 1.5 minutes, whichever is farther in the future; if an attempt is successful, no more attempts will be made, and the OCI Go SDK will not wait any longer 3. retry on the error codes 400-RelatedResourceNotAuthorizedOrNotFound, 404-NotAuthorizedOrNotFound, and 409-NotAuthorizedOrResourceAlreadyExists, for which the default retry policy does not retry, in addition to the errors the default retry policy retries on (see https://docs.oracle.com/en-us/iaas/Content/API/References/apierrors.htm) If there were no eventually consistent actions within the recent past, then this special retry strategy is not used. If you want a retry policy that does not handle eventual consistency in a special way, for example because you retry on all error responses, you can use DefaultRetryPolicyWithoutEventualConsistency or NewRetryPolicyWithOptions with the common.ReplaceWithValuesFromRetryPolicy(common.DefaultRetryPolicyWithoutEventualConsistency()) option: The NewRetryPolicy function also creates a retry policy without eventual consistency. The GO SDK uses the net/http package to make calls to OCI services. If your environment requires you to use a proxy server for outgoing HTTP requests then you can set this up in the following ways: 1. Configuring environment variable as described here https://golang.org/pkg/net/http/#ProxyFromEnvironment 2. Modifying the underlying Transport struct for a service client In order to modify the underlying Transport struct in HttpClient, you can do something similar to (sample code for audit service client): The Object Storage service supports multipart uploads to make large object uploads easier by splitting the large object into parts. The Go SDK supports raw multipart upload operations for advanced use cases, as well as a higher level upload class that uses the multipart upload APIs. For links to the APIs used for multipart upload operations, see Managing Multipart Uploads (https://docs.cloud.oracle.com/iaas/Content/Object/Tasks/usingmultipartuploads.htm). Higher level multipart uploads are implemented using the UploadManager, which will: split a large object into parts for you, upload the parts in parallel, and then recombine and commit the parts as a single object in storage. This code sample shows how to use the UploadManager to automatically split an object into parts for upload to simplify interaction with the Object Storage service: https://github.com/oracle/oci-go-sdk/blob/master/example/example_objectstorage_test.go Some response fields are enum-typed. In the future, individual services may return values not covered by existing enums for that field. To address this possibility, every enum-type response field is a modeled as a type that supports any string. Thus if a service returns a value that is not recognized by your version of the SDK, then the response field will be set to this value. When individual services return a polymorphic JSON response not available as a concrete struct, the SDK will return an implementation that only satisfies the interface modeling the polymorphic JSON response. If you are using a version of the SDK released prior to the announcement of a new region, you may need to use a workaround to reach it, depending on whether the region is in the oraclecloud.com realm. A region is a localized geographic area. For more information on regions and how to identify them, see Regions and Availability Domains(https://docs.cloud.oracle.com/iaas/Content/General/Concepts/regions.htm). A realm is a set of regions that share entities. You can identify your realm by looking at the domain name at the end of the network address. For example, the realm for xyz.abc.123.oraclecloud.com is oraclecloud.com. oraclecloud.com Realm: For regions in the oraclecloud.com realm, even if common.Region does not contain the new region, the forward compatibility of the SDK can automatically handle it. You can pass new region names just as you would pass ones that are already defined. For more information on passing region names in the configuration, see Configuring (https://github.com/oracle/oci-go-sdk/blob/master/README.md#configuring). For details on common.Region, see (https://github.com/oracle/oci-go-sdk/blob/master/common/common.go). Other Realms: For regions in realms other than oraclecloud.com, you can use the following workarounds to reach new regions with earlier versions of the SDK. NOTE: Be sure to supply the appropriate endpoints for your region. You can overwrite the target host with client.Host: If you are authenticating via instance principals, you can set the authentication endpoint in an environment variable: Got a fix for a bug, or a new feature you'd like to contribute? The SDK is open source and accepting pull requests on GitHub https://github.com/oracle/oci-go-sdk Licensing information available at: https://github.com/oracle/oci-go-sdk/blob/master/LICENSE.txt To be notified when a new version of the Go SDK is released, subscribe to the following feed: https://github.com/oracle/oci-go-sdk/releases.atom Please refer to this link: https://github.com/oracle/oci-go-sdk#help

v47.1.0 • 3 years ago

modernc.org/ql

Package ql implements a pure Go embedded SQL database engine. Builder results available at QL is a member of the SQL family of languages. It is less complex and less powerful than SQL (whichever specification SQL is considered to be). 2020-12-10: sql/database driver now supports url parameter removeemptywal=N which has the same semantics as passing RemoveEmptyWAL = N != 0 to OpenFile options. 2020-11-09: Add IF NOT EXISTS support for the INSERT INTO statement. Add IsDuplicateUniqueIndexError function. 2018-11-04: Back end file format V2 is now released. To use the new format for newly created databases set the FileFormat field in *Options passed to OpenFile to value 2 or use the driver named "ql2" instead of "ql". - Both the old and new driver will properly open and use, read and write the old (V1) or new file (V2) format of an existing database. - V1 format has a record size limit of ~64 kB. V2 format record size limit is math.MaxInt32. - V1 format uncommitted transaction size is limited by memory resources. V2 format uncommitted transaction is limited by free disk space. - A direct consequence of the previous is that small transactions perform better using V1 format and big transactions perform better using V2 format. - V2 format uses substantially less memory. 2018-08-02: Release v1.2.0 adds initial support for Go modules. 2017-01-10: Release v1.1.0 fixes some bugs and adds a configurable WAL headroom. 2016-07-29: Release v1.0.6 enables alternatively using = instead of == for equality operation. 2016-07-11: Release v1.0.5 undoes vendoring of lldb. QL now uses stable lldb (modernc.org/lldb). 2016-07-06: Release v1.0.4 fixes a panic when closing the WAL file. 2016-04-03: Release v1.0.3 fixes a data race. 2016-03-23: Release v1.0.2 vendors gitlab.com/cznic/exp/lldb and github.com/camlistore/go4/lock. 2016-03-17: Release v1.0.1 adjusts for latest goyacc. Parser error messages are improved and changed, but their exact form is not considered a API change. 2016-03-05: The current version has been tagged v1.0.0. 2015-06-15: To improve compatibility with other SQL implementations, the count built-in aggregate function now accepts * as its argument. 2015-05-29: The execution planner was rewritten from scratch. It should use indices in all places where they were used before plus in some additional situations. It is possible to investigate the plan using the newly added EXPLAIN statement. The QL tool is handy for such analysis. If the planner would have used an index, but no such exists, the plan includes hints in form of copy/paste ready CREATE INDEX statements. The planner is still quite simple and a lot of work on it is yet ahead. You can help this process by filling an issue with a schema and query which fails to use an index or indices when it should, in your opinion. Bonus points for including output of `ql 'explain <query>'`. 2015-05-09: The grammar of the CREATE INDEX statement now accepts an expression list instead of a single expression, which was further limited to just a column name or the built-in id(). As a side effect, composite indices are now functional. However, the values in the expression-list style index are not yet used by other statements or the statement/query planner. The composite index is useful while having UNIQUE clause to check for semantically duplicate rows before they get added to the table or when such a row is mutated using the UPDATE statement and the expression-list style index tuple of the row is thus recomputed. 2015-05-02: The Schema field of table __Table now correctly reflects any column constraints and/or defaults. Also, the (*DB).Info method now has that information provided in new ColumInfo fields NotNull, Constraint and Default. 2015-04-20: Added support for {LEFT,RIGHT,FULL} [OUTER] JOIN. 2015-04-18: Column definitions can now have constraints and defaults. Details are discussed in the "Constraints and defaults" chapter below the CREATE TABLE statement documentation. 2015-03-06: New built-in functions formatFloat and formatInt. Thanks urandom! (https://github.com/urandom) 2015-02-16: IN predicate now accepts a SELECT statement. See the updated "Predicates" section. 2015-01-17: Logical operators || and && have now alternative spellings: OR and AND (case insensitive). AND was a keyword before, but OR is a new one. This can possibly break existing queries. For the record, it's a good idea to not use any name appearing in, for example, [7] in your queries as the list of QL's keywords may expand for gaining better compatibility with existing SQL "standards". 2015-01-12: ACID guarantees were tightened at the cost of performance in some cases. The write collecting window mechanism, a formerly used implementation detail, was removed. Inserting rows one by one in a transaction is now slow. I mean very slow. Try to avoid inserting single rows in a transaction. Instead, whenever possible, perform batch updates of tens to, say thousands of rows in a single transaction. See also: http://www.sqlite.org/faq.html#q19, the discussed synchronization principles involved are the same as for QL, modulo minor details. Note: A side effect is that closing a DB before exiting an application, both for the Go API and through database/sql driver, is no more required, strictly speaking. Beware that exiting an application while there is an open (uncommitted) transaction in progress means losing the transaction data. However, the DB will not become corrupted because of not closing it. Nor that was the case before, but formerly failing to close a DB could have resulted in losing the data of the last transaction. 2014-09-21: id() now optionally accepts a single argument - a table name. 2014-09-01: Added the DB.Flush() method and the LIKE pattern matching predicate. 2014-08-08: The built in functions max and min now accept also time values. Thanks opennota! (https://github.com/opennota) 2014-06-05: RecordSet interface extended by new methods FirstRow and Rows. 2014-06-02: Indices on id() are now used by SELECT statements. 2014-05-07: Introduction of Marshal, Schema, Unmarshal. 2014-04-15: Added optional IF NOT EXISTS clause to CREATE INDEX and optional IF EXISTS clause to DROP INDEX. 2014-04-12: The column Unique in the virtual table __Index was renamed to IsUnique because the old name is a keyword. Unfortunately, this is a breaking change, sorry. 2014-04-11: Introduction of LIMIT, OFFSET. 2014-04-10: Introduction of query rewriting. 2014-04-07: Introduction of indices. QL imports zappy[8], a block-based compressor, which speeds up its performance by using a C version of the compression/decompression algorithms. If a CGO-free (pure Go) version of QL, or an app using QL, is required, please include 'purego' in the -tags option of go {build,get,install}. For example: If zappy was installed before installing QL, it might be necessary to rebuild zappy first (or rebuild QL with all its dependencies using the -a option): The syntax is specified using Extended Backus-Naur Form (EBNF) Lower-case production names are used to identify lexical tokens. Non-terminals are in CamelCase. Lexical tokens are enclosed in double quotes "" or back quotes “. The form a … b represents the set of characters from a through b as alternatives. The horizontal ellipsis … is also used elsewhere in the spec to informally denote various enumerations or code snippets that are not further specified. QL source code is Unicode text encoded in UTF-8. The text is not canonicalized, so a single accented code point is distinct from the same character constructed from combining an accent and a letter; those are treated as two code points. For simplicity, this document will use the unqualified term character to refer to a Unicode code point in the source text. Each code point is distinct; for instance, upper and lower case letters are different characters. Implementation restriction: For compatibility with other tools, the parser may disallow the NUL character (U+0000) in the statement. Implementation restriction: A byte order mark is disallowed anywhere in QL statements. The following terms are used to denote specific character classes The underscore character _ (U+005F) is considered a letter. Lexical elements are comments, tokens, identifiers, keywords, operators and delimiters, integer, floating-point, imaginary, rune and string literals and QL parameters. Line comments start with the character sequence // or -- and stop at the end of the line. A line comment acts like a space. General comments start with the character sequence /* and continue through the character sequence */. A general comment acts like a space. Comments do not nest. Tokens form the vocabulary of QL. There are four classes: identifiers, keywords, operators and delimiters, and literals. White space, formed from spaces (U+0020), horizontal tabs (U+0009), carriage returns (U+000D), and newlines (U+000A), is ignored except as it separates tokens that would otherwise combine into a single token. The formal grammar uses semicolons ";" as separators of QL statements. A single QL statement or the last QL statement in a list of statements can have an optional semicolon terminator. (Actually a separator from the following empty statement.) Identifiers name entities such as tables or record set columns. There are two kinds of identifiers, normal idententifiers and quoted identifiers. An normal identifier is a sequence of one or more letters and digits. The first character in an identifier must be a letter. For example A quoted identifier is a string of any charaters between guillmets «». Quoted identifiers allow QL key words or phrases with spaces to be used as identifiers. The guillemets were chosen because QL already uses double quotes, single quotes, and backticks for other quoting purposes. «TRANSACTION» «duration» «lovely stories» No identifiers are predeclared, however note that no keyword can be used as a normal identifier. Identifiers starting with two underscores are used for meta data virtual tables names. For forward compatibility, users should generally avoid using any identifiers starting with two underscores. For example The following keywords are reserved and may not be used as identifiers. Keywords are not case sensitive. The following character sequences represent operators, delimiters, and other special tokens Operators consisting of more than one character are referred to by names in the rest of the documentation An integer literal is a sequence of digits representing an integer constant. An optional prefix sets a non-decimal base: 0 for octal, 0x or 0X for hexadecimal. In hexadecimal literals, letters a-f and A-F represent values 10 through 15. For example A floating-point literal is a decimal representation of a floating-point constant. It has an integer part, a decimal point, a fractional part, and an exponent part. The integer and fractional part comprise decimal digits; the exponent part is an e or E followed by an optionally signed decimal exponent. One of the integer part or the fractional part may be elided; one of the decimal point or the exponent may be elided. For example An imaginary literal is a decimal representation of the imaginary part of a complex constant. It consists of a floating-point literal or decimal integer followed by the lower-case letter i. For example A rune literal represents a rune constant, an integer value identifying a Unicode code point. A rune literal is expressed as one or more characters enclosed in single quotes. Within the quotes, any character may appear except single quote and newline. A single quoted character represents the Unicode value of the character itself, while multi-character sequences beginning with a backslash encode values in various formats. The simplest form represents the single character within the quotes; since QL statements are Unicode characters encoded in UTF-8, multiple UTF-8-encoded bytes may represent a single integer value. For instance, the literal 'a' holds a single byte representing a literal a, Unicode U+0061, value 0x61, while 'ä' holds two bytes (0xc3 0xa4) representing a literal a-dieresis, U+00E4, value 0xe4. Several backslash escapes allow arbitrary values to be encoded as ASCII text. There are four ways to represent the integer value as a numeric constant: \x followed by exactly two hexadecimal digits; \u followed by exactly four hexadecimal digits; \U followed by exactly eight hexadecimal digits, and a plain backslash \ followed by exactly three octal digits. In each case the value of the literal is the value represented by the digits in the corresponding base. Although these representations all result in an integer, they have different valid ranges. Octal escapes must represent a value between 0 and 255 inclusive. Hexadecimal escapes satisfy this condition by construction. The escapes \u and \U represent Unicode code points so within them some values are illegal, in particular those above 0x10FFFF and surrogate halves. After a backslash, certain single-character escapes represent special values All other sequences starting with a backslash are illegal inside rune literals. For example A string literal represents a string constant obtained from concatenating a sequence of characters. There are two forms: raw string literals and interpreted string literals. Raw string literals are character sequences between back quotes “. Within the quotes, any character is legal except back quote. The value of a raw string literal is the string composed of the uninterpreted (implicitly UTF-8-encoded) characters between the quotes; in particular, backslashes have no special meaning and the string may contain newlines. Carriage returns inside raw string literals are discarded from the raw string value. Interpreted string literals are character sequences between double quotes "". The text between the quotes, which may not contain newlines, forms the value of the literal, with backslash escapes interpreted as they are in rune literals (except that \' is illegal and \" is legal), with the same restrictions. The three-digit octal (\nnn) and two-digit hexadecimal (\xnn) escapes represent individual bytes of the resulting string; all other escapes represent the (possibly multi-byte) UTF-8 encoding of individual characters. Thus inside a string literal \377 and \xFF represent a single byte of value 0xFF=255, while ÿ, \u00FF, \U000000FF and \xc3\xbf represent the two bytes 0xc3 0xbf of the UTF-8 encoding of character U+00FF. For example These examples all represent the same string If the statement source represents a character as two code points, such as a combining form involving an accent and a letter, the result will be an error if placed in a rune literal (it is not a single code point), and will appear as two code points if placed in a string literal. Literals are assigned their values from the respective text representation at "compile" (parse) time. QL parameters provide the same functionality as literals, but their value is assigned at execution time from an expression list passed to DB.Run or DB.Execute. Using '?' or '$' is completely equivalent. For example Keywords 'false' and 'true' (not case sensitive) represent the two possible constant values of type bool (also not case sensitive). Keyword 'NULL' (not case sensitive) represents an untyped constant which is assignable to any type. NULL is distinct from any other value of any type. A type determines the set of values and operations specific to values of that type. A type is specified by a type name. Named instances of the boolean, numeric, and string types are keywords. The names are not case sensitive. Note: The blob type is exchanged between the back end and the API as []byte. On 32 bit platforms this limits the size which the implementation can handle to 2G. A boolean type represents the set of Boolean truth values denoted by the predeclared constants true and false. The predeclared boolean type is bool. A duration type represents the elapsed time between two instants as an int64 nanosecond count. The representation limits the largest representable duration to approximately 290 years. A numeric type represents sets of integer or floating-point values. The predeclared architecture-independent numeric types are The value of an n-bit integer is n bits wide and represented using two's complement arithmetic. Conversions are required when different numeric types are mixed in an expression or assignment. A string type represents the set of string values. A string value is a (possibly empty) sequence of bytes. The case insensitive keyword for the string type is 'string'. The length of a string (its size in bytes) can be discovered using the built-in function len. A time type represents an instant in time with nanosecond precision. Each time has associated with it a location, consulted when computing the presentation form of the time. The following functions are implicitly declared An expression specifies the computation of a value by applying operators and functions to operands. Operands denote the elementary values in an expression. An operand may be a literal, a (possibly qualified) identifier denoting a constant or a function or a table/record set column, or a parenthesized expression. A qualified identifier is an identifier qualified with a table/record set name prefix. For example Primary expression are the operands for unary and binary expressions. For example A primary expression of the form denotes the element of a string indexed by x. Its type is byte. The value x is called the index. The following rules apply - The index x must be of integer type except bigint or duration; it is in range if 0 <= x < len(s), otherwise it is out of range. - A constant index must be non-negative and representable by a value of type int. - A constant index must be in range if the string a is a literal. - If x is out of range at run time, a run-time error occurs. - s[x] is the byte at index x and the type of s[x] is byte. If s is NULL or x is NULL then the result is NULL. Otherwise s[x] is illegal. For a string, the primary expression constructs a substring. The indices low and high select which elements appear in the result. The result has indices starting at 0 and length equal to high - low. For convenience, any of the indices may be omitted. A missing low index defaults to zero; a missing high index defaults to the length of the sliced operand The indices low and high are in range if 0 <= low <= high <= len(a), otherwise they are out of range. A constant index must be non-negative and representable by a value of type int. If both indices are constant, they must satisfy low <= high. If the indices are out of range at run time, a run-time error occurs. Integer values of type bigint or duration cannot be used as indices. If s is NULL the result is NULL. If low or high is not omitted and is NULL then the result is NULL. Given an identifier f denoting a predeclared function, calls f with arguments a1, a2, … an. Arguments are evaluated before the function is called. The type of the expression is the result type of f. In a function call, the function value and arguments are evaluated in the usual order. After they are evaluated, the parameters of the call are passed by value to the function and the called function begins execution. The return value of the function is passed by value when the function returns. Calling an undefined function causes a compile-time error. Operators combine operands into expressions. Comparisons are discussed elsewhere. For other binary operators, the operand types must be identical unless the operation involves shifts or untyped constants. For operations involving constants only, see the section on constant expressions. Except for shift operations, if one operand is an untyped constant and the other operand is not, the constant is converted to the type of the other operand. The right operand in a shift expression must have unsigned integer type or be an untyped constant that can be converted to unsigned integer type. If the left operand of a non-constant shift expression is an untyped constant, the type of the constant is what it would be if the shift expression were replaced by its left operand alone. Expressions of the form yield a boolean value true if expr2, a regular expression, matches expr1 (see also [6]). Both expression must be of type string. If any one of the expressions is NULL the result is NULL. Predicates are special form expressions having a boolean result type. Expressions of the form are equivalent, including NULL handling, to The types of involved expressions must be comparable as defined in "Comparison operators". Another form of the IN predicate creates the expression list from a result of a SelectStmt. The SelectStmt must select only one column. The produced expression list is resource limited by the memory available to the process. NULL values produced by the SelectStmt are ignored, but if all records of the SelectStmt are NULL the predicate yields NULL. The select statement is evaluated only once. If the type of expr is not the same as the type of the field returned by the SelectStmt then the set operation yields false. The type of the column returned by the SelectStmt must be one of the simple (non blob-like) types: Expressions of the form are equivalent, including NULL handling, to The types of involved expressions must be ordered as defined in "Comparison operators". Expressions of the form yield a boolean value true if expr does not have a specific type (case A) or if expr has a specific type (case B). In other cases the result is a boolean value false. Unary operators have the highest precedence. There are five precedence levels for binary operators. Multiplication operators bind strongest, followed by addition operators, comparison operators, && (logical AND), and finally || (logical OR) Binary operators of the same precedence associate from left to right. For instance, x / y * z is the same as (x / y) * z. Note that the operator precedence is reflected explicitly by the grammar. Arithmetic operators apply to numeric values and yield a result of the same type as the first operand. The four standard arithmetic operators (+, -, *, /) apply to integer, rational, floating-point, and complex types; + also applies to strings; +,- also applies to times. All other arithmetic operators apply to integers only. sum integers, rationals, floats, complex values, strings difference integers, rationals, floats, complex values, times product integers, rationals, floats, complex values / quotient integers, rationals, floats, complex values % remainder integers & bitwise AND integers | bitwise OR integers ^ bitwise XOR integers &^ bit clear (AND NOT) integers << left shift integer << unsigned integer >> right shift integer >> unsigned integer Strings can be concatenated using the + operator String addition creates a new string by concatenating the operands. A value of type duration can be added to or subtracted from a value of type time. Times can subtracted from each other producing a value of type duration. For two integer values x and y, the integer quotient q = x / y and remainder r = x % y satisfy the following relationships with x / y truncated towards zero ("truncated division"). As an exception to this rule, if the dividend x is the most negative value for the int type of x, the quotient q = x / -1 is equal to x (and r = 0). If the divisor is a constant expression, it must not be zero. If the divisor is zero at run time, a run-time error occurs. If the dividend is non-negative and the divisor is a constant power of 2, the division may be replaced by a right shift, and computing the remainder may be replaced by a bitwise AND operation The shift operators shift the left operand by the shift count specified by the right operand. They implement arithmetic shifts if the left operand is a signed integer and logical shifts if it is an unsigned integer. There is no upper limit on the shift count. Shifts behave as if the left operand is shifted n times by 1 for a shift count of n. As a result, x << 1 is the same as x*2 and x >> 1 is the same as x/2 but truncated towards negative infinity. For integer operands, the unary operators +, -, and ^ are defined as follows For floating-point and complex numbers, +x is the same as x, while -x is the negation of x. The result of a floating-point or complex division by zero is not specified beyond the IEEE-754 standard; whether a run-time error occurs is implementation-specific. Whenever any operand of any arithmetic operation, unary or binary, is NULL, as well as in the case of the string concatenating operation, the result is NULL. For unsigned integer values, the operations +, -, *, and << are computed modulo 2n, where n is the bit width of the unsigned integer's type. Loosely speaking, these unsigned integer operations discard high bits upon overflow, and expressions may rely on “wrap around”. For signed integers with a finite bit width, the operations +, -, *, and << may legally overflow and the resulting value exists and is deterministically defined by the signed integer representation, the operation, and its operands. No exception is raised as a result of overflow. An evaluator may not optimize an expression under the assumption that overflow does not occur. For instance, it may not assume that x < x + 1 is always true. Integers of type bigint and rationals do not overflow but their handling is limited by the memory resources available to the program. Comparison operators compare two operands and yield a boolean value. In any comparison, the first operand must be of same type as is the second operand, or vice versa. The equality operators == and != apply to operands that are comparable. The ordering operators <, <=, >, and >= apply to operands that are ordered. These terms and the result of the comparisons are defined as follows - Boolean values are comparable. Two boolean values are equal if they are either both true or both false. - Complex values are comparable. Two complex values u and v are equal if both real(u) == real(v) and imag(u) == imag(v). - Integer values are comparable and ordered, in the usual way. Note that durations are integers. - Floating point values are comparable and ordered, as defined by the IEEE-754 standard. - Rational values are comparable and ordered, in the usual way. - String and Blob values are comparable and ordered, lexically byte-wise. - Time values are comparable and ordered. Whenever any operand of any comparison operation is NULL, the result is NULL. Note that slices are always of type string. Logical operators apply to boolean values and yield a boolean result. The right operand is evaluated conditionally. The truth tables for logical operations with NULL values Conversions are expressions of the form T(x) where T is a type and x is an expression that can be converted to type T. A constant value x can be converted to type T in any of these cases: - x is representable by a value of type T. - x is a floating-point constant, T is a floating-point type, and x is representable by a value of type T after rounding using IEEE 754 round-to-even rules. The constant T(x) is the rounded value. - x is an integer constant and T is a string type. The same rule as for non-constant x applies in this case. Converting a constant yields a typed constant as result. A non-constant value x can be converted to type T in any of these cases: - x has type T. - x's type and T are both integer or floating point types. - x's type and T are both complex types. - x is an integer, except bigint or duration, and T is a string type. Specific rules apply to (non-constant) conversions between numeric types or to and from a string type. These conversions may change the representation of x and incur a run-time cost. All other conversions only change the type but not the representation of x. A conversion of NULL to any type yields NULL. For the conversion of non-constant numeric values, the following rules apply 1. When converting between integer types, if the value is a signed integer, it is sign extended to implicit infinite precision; otherwise it is zero extended. It is then truncated to fit in the result type's size. For example, if v == uint16(0x10F0), then uint32(int8(v)) == 0xFFFFFFF0. The conversion always yields a valid value; there is no indication of overflow. 2. When converting a floating-point number to an integer, the fraction is discarded (truncation towards zero). 3. When converting an integer or floating-point number to a floating-point type, or a complex number to another complex type, the result value is rounded to the precision specified by the destination type. For instance, the value of a variable x of type float32 may be stored using additional precision beyond that of an IEEE-754 32-bit number, but float32(x) represents the result of rounding x's value to 32-bit precision. Similarly, x + 0.1 may use more than 32 bits of precision, but float32(x + 0.1) does not. In all non-constant conversions involving floating-point or complex values, if the result type cannot represent the value the conversion succeeds but the result value is implementation-dependent. 1. Converting a signed or unsigned integer value to a string type yields a string containing the UTF-8 representation of the integer. Values outside the range of valid Unicode code points are converted to "\uFFFD". 2. Converting a blob to a string type yields a string whose successive bytes are the elements of the blob. 3. Converting a value of a string type to a blob yields a blob whose successive elements are the bytes of the string. 4. Converting a value of a bigint type to a string yields a string containing the decimal decimal representation of the integer. 5. Converting a value of a string type to a bigint yields a bigint value containing the integer represented by the string value. A prefix of “0x” or “0X” selects base 16; the “0” prefix selects base 8, and a “0b” or “0B” prefix selects base 2. Otherwise the value is interpreted in base 10. An error occurs if the string value is not in any valid format. 6. Converting a value of a rational type to a string yields a string containing the decimal decimal representation of the rational in the form "a/b" (even if b == 1). 7. Converting a value of a string type to a bigrat yields a bigrat value containing the rational represented by the string value. The string can be given as a fraction "a/b" or as a floating-point number optionally followed by an exponent. An error occurs if the string value is not in any valid format. 8. Converting a value of a duration type to a string returns a string representing the duration in the form "72h3m0.5s". Leading zero units are omitted. As a special case, durations less than one second format using a smaller unit (milli-, micro-, or nanoseconds) to ensure that the leading digit is non-zero. The zero duration formats as 0, with no unit. 9. Converting a string value to a duration yields a duration represented by the string. A duration string is a possibly signed sequence of decimal numbers, each with optional fraction and a unit suffix, such as "300ms", "-1.5h" or "2h45m". Valid time units are "ns", "us" (or "µs"), "ms", "s", "m", "h". 10. Converting a time value to a string returns the time formatted using the format string When evaluating the operands of an expression or of function calls, operations are evaluated in lexical left-to-right order. For example, in the evaluation of the function calls and evaluation of c happen in the order h(), i(), j(), c. Floating-point operations within a single expression are evaluated according to the associativity of the operators. Explicit parentheses affect the evaluation by overriding the default associativity. In the expression x + (y + z) the addition y + z is performed before adding x. Statements control execution. The empty statement does nothing. Alter table statements modify existing tables. With the ADD clause it adds a new column to the table. The column must not exist. With the DROP clause it removes an existing column from a table. The column must exist and it must be not the only (last) column of the table. IOW, there cannot be a table with no columns. For example When adding a column to a table with existing data, the constraint clause of the ColumnDef cannot be used. Adding a constrained column to an empty table is fine. Begin transactions statements introduce a new transaction level. Every transaction level must be eventually balanced by exactly one of COMMIT or ROLLBACK statements. Note that when a transaction is roll-backed because of a statement failure then no explicit balancing of the respective BEGIN TRANSACTION is statement is required nor permitted. Failure to properly balance any opened transaction level may cause dead locks and/or lose of data updated in the uppermost opened but never properly closed transaction level. For example A database cannot be updated (mutated) outside of a transaction. Statements requiring a transaction A database is effectively read only outside of a transaction. Statements not requiring a transaction The commit statement closes the innermost transaction nesting level. If that's the outermost level then the updates to the DB made by the transaction are atomically made persistent. For example Create index statements create new indices. Index is a named projection of ordered values of a table column to the respective records. As a special case the id() of the record can be indexed. Index name must not be the same as any of the existing tables and it also cannot be the same as of any column name of the table the index is on. For example Now certain SELECT statements may use the indices to speed up joins and/or to speed up record set filtering when the WHERE clause is used; or the indices might be used to improve the performance when the ORDER BY clause is present. The UNIQUE modifier requires the indexed values tuple to be index-wise unique or have all values NULL. The optional IF NOT EXISTS clause makes the statement a no operation if the index already exists. A simple index consists of only one expression which must be either a column name or the built-in id(). A more complex and more general index is one that consists of more than one expression or its single expression does not qualify as a simple index. In this case the type of all expressions in the list must be one of the non blob-like types. Note: Blob-like types are blob, bigint, bigrat, time and duration. Create table statements create new tables. A column definition declares the column name and type. Table names and column names are case sensitive. Neither a table or an index of the same name may exist in the DB. For example The optional IF NOT EXISTS clause makes the statement a no operation if the table already exists. The optional constraint clause has two forms. The first one is found in many SQL dialects. This form prevents the data in column DepartmentName to be NULL. The second form allows an arbitrary boolean expression to be used to validate the column. If the value of the expression is true then the validation succeeded. If the value of the expression is false or NULL then the validation fails. If the value of the expression is not of type bool an error occurs. The optional DEFAULT clause is an expression which, if present, is substituted instead of a NULL value when the colum is assigned a value. Note that the constraint and/or default expressions may refer to other columns by name: When a table row is inserted by the INSERT INTO statement or when a table row is updated by the UPDATE statement, the order of operations is as follows: 1. The new values of the affected columns are set and the values of all the row columns become the named values which can be referred to in default expressions evaluated in step 2. 2. If any row column value is NULL and the DEFAULT clause is present in the column's definition, the default expression is evaluated and its value is set as the respective column value. 3. The values, potentially updated, of row columns become the named values which can be referred to in constraint expressions evaluated during step 4. 4. All row columns which definition has the constraint clause present will have that constraint checked. If any constraint violation is detected, the overall operation fails and no changes to the table are made. Delete from statements remove rows from a table, which must exist. For example If the WHERE clause is not present then all rows are removed and the statement is equivalent to the TRUNCATE TABLE statement. Drop index statements remove indices from the DB. The index must exist. For example The optional IF EXISTS clause makes the statement a no operation if the index does not exist. Drop table statements remove tables from the DB. The table must exist. For example The optional IF EXISTS clause makes the statement a no operation if the table does not exist. Insert into statements insert new rows into tables. New rows come from literal data, if using the VALUES clause, or are a result of select statement. In the later case the select statement is fully evaluated before the insertion of any rows is performed, allowing to insert values calculated from the same table rows are to be inserted into. If the ColumnNameList part is omitted then the number of values inserted in the row must be the same as are columns in the table. If the ColumnNameList part is present then the number of values per row must be same as the same number of column names. All other columns of the record are set to NULL. The type of the value assigned to a column must be the same as is the column's type or the value must be NULL. If there exists an unique index that would make the insert statement fail, the optional IF NOT EXISTS turns the insert statement in such case into a no-op. For example If any of the columns of the table were defined using the optional constraints clause or the optional defaults clause then those are processed on a per row basis. The details are discussed in the "Constraints and defaults" chapter below the CREATE TABLE statement documentation. Explain statement produces a recordset consisting of lines of text which describe the execution plan of a statement, if any. For example, the QL tool treats the explain statement specially and outputs the joined lines: The explanation may aid in uderstanding how a statement/query would be executed and if indices are used as expected - or which indices may possibly improve the statement performance. The create index statements above were directly copy/pasted in the terminal from the suggestions provided by the filter recordset pipeline part returned by the explain statement. If the statement has nothing special in its plan, the result is the original statement. To get an explanation of the select statement of the IN predicate, use the EXPLAIN statement with that particular select statement. The rollback statement closes the innermost transaction nesting level discarding any updates to the DB made by it. If that's the outermost level then the effects on the DB are as if the transaction never happened. For example The (temporary) record set from the last statement is returned and can be processed by the client. In this case the rollback is the same as 'DROP TABLE tmp;' but it can be a more complex operation. Select from statements produce recordsets. The optional DISTINCT modifier ensures all rows in the result recordset are unique. Either all of the resulting fields are returned ('*') or only those named in FieldList. RecordSetList is a list of table names or parenthesized select statements, optionally (re)named using the AS clause. The result can be filtered using a WhereClause and orderd by the OrderBy clause. For example If Recordset is a nested, parenthesized SelectStmt then it must be given a name using the AS clause if its field are to be accessible in expressions. A field is an named expression. Identifiers, not used as a type in conversion or a function name in the Call clause, denote names of (other) fields, values of which should be used in the expression. The expression can be named using the AS clause. If the AS clause is not present and the expression consists solely of a field name, then that field name is used as the name of the resulting field. Otherwise the field is unnamed. For example The SELECT statement can optionally enumerate the desired/resulting fields in a list. No two identical field names can appear in the list. When more than one record set is used in the FROM clause record set list, the result record set field names are rewritten to be qualified using the record set names. If a particular record set doesn't have a name, its respective fields became unnamed. The optional JOIN clause, for example is mostly equal to except that the rows from a which, when they appear in the cross join, never made expr to evaluate to true, are combined with a virtual row from b, containing all nulls, and added to the result set. For the RIGHT JOIN variant the discussed rules are used for rows from b not satisfying expr == true and the virtual, all-null row "comes" from a. The FULL JOIN adds the respective rows which would be otherwise provided by the separate executions of the LEFT JOIN and RIGHT JOIN variants. For more thorough OUTER JOIN discussion please see the Wikipedia article at [10]. Resultins rows of a SELECT statement can be optionally ordered by the ORDER BY clause. Collating proceeds by considering the expressions in the expression list left to right until a collating order is determined. Any possibly remaining expressions are not evaluated. All of the expression values must yield an ordered type or NULL. Ordered types are defined in "Comparison operators". Collating of elements having a NULL value is different compared to what the comparison operators yield in expression evaluation (NULL result instead of a boolean value). Below, T denotes a non NULL value of any QL type. NULL collates before any non NULL value (is considered smaller than T). Two NULLs have no collating order (are considered equal). The WHERE clause restricts records considered by some statements, like SELECT FROM, DELETE FROM, or UPDATE. It is an error if the expression evaluates to a non null value of non bool type. Another form of the WHERE clause is an existence predicate of a parenthesized select statement. The EXISTS form evaluates to true if the parenthesized SELECT statement produces a non empty record set. The NOT EXISTS form evaluates to true if the parenthesized SELECT statement produces an empty record set. The parenthesized SELECT statement is evaluated only once (TODO issue #159). The GROUP BY clause is used to project rows having common values into a smaller set of rows. For example Using the GROUP BY without any aggregate functions in the selected fields is in certain cases equal to using the DISTINCT modifier. The last two examples above produce the same resultsets. The optional OFFSET clause allows to ignore first N records. For example The above will produce only rows 11, 12, ... of the record set, if they exist. The value of the expression must a non negative integer, but not bigint or duration. The optional LIMIT clause allows to ignore all but first N records. For example The above will return at most the first 10 records of the record set. The value of the expression must a non negative integer, but not bigint or duration. The LIMIT and OFFSET clauses can be combined. For example Considering table t has, say 10 records, the above will produce only records 4 - 8. After returning record #8, no more result rows/records are computed. 1. The FROM clause is evaluated, producing a Cartesian product of its source record sets (tables or nested SELECT statements). 2. If present, the JOIN cluase is evaluated on the result set of the previous evaluation and the recordset specified by the JOIN clause. (... JOIN Recordset ON ...) 3. If present, the WHERE clause is evaluated on the result set of the previous evaluation. 4. If present, the GROUP BY clause is evaluated on the result set of the previous evaluation(s). 5. The SELECT field expressions are evaluated on the result set of the previous evaluation(s). 6. If present, the DISTINCT modifier is evaluated on the result set of the previous evaluation(s). 7. If present, the ORDER BY clause is evaluated on the result set of the previous evaluation(s). 8. If present, the OFFSET clause is evaluated on the result set of the previous evaluation(s). The offset expression is evaluated once for the first record produced by the previous evaluations. 9. If present, the LIMIT clause is evaluated on the result set of the previous evaluation(s). The limit expression is evaluated once for the first record produced by the previous evaluations. Truncate table statements remove all records from a table. The table must exist. For example Update statements change values of fields in rows of a table. For example Note: The SET clause is optional. If any of the columns of the table were defined using the optional constraints clause or the optional defaults clause then those are processed on a per row basis. The details are discussed in the "Constraints and defaults" chapter below the CREATE TABLE statement documentation. To allow to query for DB meta data, there exist specially named tables, some of them being virtual. Note: Virtual system tables may have fake table-wise unique but meaningless and unstable record IDs. Do not apply the built-in id() to any system table. The table __Table lists all tables in the DB. The schema is The Schema column returns the statement to (re)create table Name. This table is virtual. The table __Colum lists all columns of all tables in the DB. The schema is The Ordinal column defines the 1-based index of the column in the record. This table is virtual. The table __Colum2 lists all columns of all tables in the DB which have the constraint NOT NULL or which have a constraint expression defined or which have a default expression defined. The schema is It's possible to obtain a consolidated recordset for all properties of all DB columns using The Name column is the column name in TableName. The table __Index lists all indices in the DB. The schema is The IsUnique columns reflects if the index was created using the optional UNIQUE clause. This table is virtual. Built-in functions are predeclared. The built-in aggregate function avg returns the average of values of an expression. Avg ignores NULL values, but returns NULL if all values of a column are NULL or if avg is applied to an empty record set. The column values must be of a numeric type. The built-in function coalesce takes at least one argument and returns the first of its arguments which is not NULL. If all arguments are NULL, this function returns NULL. This is useful for providing defaults for NULL values in a select query. The built-in function contains returns true if substr is within s. If any argument to contains is NULL the result is NULL. The built-in aggregate function count returns how many times an expression has a non NULL values or the number of rows in a record set. Note: count() returns 0 for an empty record set. For example Date returns the time corresponding to in the appropriate zone for that time in the given location. The month, day, hour, min, sec, and nsec values may be outside their usual ranges and will be normalized during the conversion. For example, October 32 converts to November 1. A daylight savings time transition skips or repeats times. For example, in the United States, March 13, 2011 2:15am never occurred, while November 6, 2011 1:15am occurred twice. In such cases, the choice of time zone, and therefore the time, is not well-defined. Date returns a time that is correct in one of the two zones involved in the transition, but it does not guarantee which. A location maps time instants to the zone in use at that time. Typically, the location represents the collection of time offsets in use in a geographical area, such as "CEST" and "CET" for central Europe. "local" represents the system's local time zone. "UTC" represents Universal Coordinated Time (UTC). The month specifies a month of the year (January = 1, ...). If any argument to date is NULL the result is NULL. The built-in function day returns the day of the month specified by t. If the argument to day is NULL the result is NULL. The built-in function formatTime returns a textual representation of the time value formatted according to layout, which defines the format by showing how the reference time, would be displayed if it were the value; it serves as an example of the desired output. The same display rules will then be applied to the time value. If any argument to formatTime is NULL the result is NULL. NOTE: The string value of the time zone, like "CET" or "ACDT", is dependent on the time zone of the machine the function is run on. For example, if the t value is in "CET", but the machine is in "ACDT", instead of "CET" the result is "+0100". This is the same what Go (time.Time).String() returns and in fact formatTime directly calls t.String(). returns on a machine in the CET time zone, but may return on a machine in the ACDT zone. The time value is in both cases the same so its ordering and comparing is correct. Only the display value can differ. The built-in functions formatFloat and formatInt format numbers to strings using go's number format functions in the `strconv` package. For all three functions, only the first argument is mandatory. The default values of the rest are shown in the examples. If the first argument is NULL, the result is NULL. returns returns returns Unlike the `strconv` equivalent, the formatInt function handles all integer types, both signed and unsigned. The built-in function hasPrefix tests whether the string s begins with prefix. If any argument to hasPrefix is NULL the result is NULL. The built-in function hasSuffix tests whether the string s ends with suffix. If any argument to hasSuffix is NULL the result is NULL. The built-in function hour returns the hour within the day specified by t, in the range [0, 23]. If the argument to hour is NULL the result is NULL. The built-in function hours returns the duration as a floating point number of hours. If the argument to hours is NULL the result is NULL. The built-in function id takes zero or one arguments. If no argument is provided, id() returns a table-unique automatically assigned numeric identifier of type int. Ids of deleted records are not reused unless the DB becomes completely empty (has no tables). For example If id() without arguments is called for a row which is not a table record then the result value is NULL. For example If id() has one argument it must be a table name of a table in a cross join. For example The built-in function len takes a string argument and returns the lentgh of the string in bytes. The expression len(s) is constant if s is a string constant. If the argument to len is NULL the result is NULL. The built-in aggregate function max returns the largest value of an expression in a record set. Max ignores NULL values, but returns NULL if all values of a column are NULL or if max is applied to an empty record set. The expression values must be of an ordered type. For example The built-in aggregate function min returns the smallest value of an expression in a record set. Min ignores NULL values, but returns NULL if all values of a column are NULL or if min is applied to an empty record set. For example The column values must be of an ordered type. The built-in function minute returns the minute offset within the hour specified by t, in the range [0, 59]. If the argument to minute is NULL the result is NULL. The built-in function minutes returns the duration as a floating point number of minutes. If the argument to minutes is NULL the result is NULL. The built-in function month returns the month of the year specified by t (January = 1, ...). If the argument to month is NULL the result is NULL. The built-in function nanosecond returns the nanosecond offset within the second specified by t, in the range [0, 999999999]. If the argument to nanosecond is NULL the result is NULL. The built-in function nanoseconds returns the duration as an integer nanosecond count. If the argument to nanoseconds is NULL the result is NULL. The built-in function now returns the current local time. The built-in function parseTime parses a formatted string and returns the time value it represents. The layout defines the format by showing how the reference time, would be interpreted if it were the value; it serves as an example of the input format. The same interpretation will then be made to the input string. Elements omitted from the value are assumed to be zero or, when zero is impossible, one, so parsing "3:04pm" returns the time corresponding to Jan 1, year 0, 15:04:00 UTC (note that because the year is 0, this time is before the zero Time). Years must be in the range 0000..9999. The day of the week is checked for syntax but it is otherwise ignored. In the absence of a time zone indicator, parseTime returns a time in UTC. When parsing a time with a zone offset like -0700, if the offset corresponds to a time zone used by the current location, then parseTime uses that location and zone in the returned time. Otherwise it records the time as being in a fabricated location with time fixed at the given zone offset. When parsing a time with a zone abbreviation like MST, if the zone abbreviation has a defined offset in the current location, then that offset is used. The zone abbreviation "UTC" is recognized as UTC regardless of location. If the zone abbreviation is unknown, Parse records the time as being in a fabricated location with the given zone abbreviation and a zero offset. This choice means that such a time can be parses and reformatted with the same layout losslessly, but the exact instant used in the representation will differ by the actual zone offset. To avoid such problems, prefer time layouts that use a numeric zone offset. If any argument to parseTime is NULL the result is NULL. The built-in function second returns the second offset within the minute specified by t, in the range [0, 59]. If the argument to second is NULL the result is NULL. The built-in function seconds returns the duration as a floating point number of seconds. If the argument to seconds is NULL the result is NULL. The built-in function since returns the time elapsed since t. It is shorthand for now()-t. If the argument to since is NULL the result is NULL. The built-in aggregate function sum returns the sum of values of an expression for all rows of a record set. Sum ignores NULL values, but returns NULL if all values of a column are NULL or if sum is applied to an empty record set. The column values must be of a numeric type. The built-in function timeIn returns t with the location information set to loc. For discussion of the loc argument please see date(). If any argument to timeIn is NULL the result is NULL. The built-in function weekday returns the day of the week specified by t. Sunday == 0, Monday == 1, ... If the argument to weekday is NULL the result is NULL. The built-in function year returns the year in which t occurs. If the argument to year is NULL the result is NULL. The built-in function yearDay returns the day of the year specified by t, in the range [1,365] for non-leap years, and [1,366] in leap years. If the argument to yearDay is NULL the result is NULL. Three functions assemble and disassemble complex numbers. The built-in function complex constructs a complex value from a floating-point real and imaginary part, while real and imag extract the real and imaginary parts of a complex value. The type of the arguments and return value correspond. For complex, the two arguments must be of the same floating-point type and the return type is the complex type with the corresponding floating-point constituents: complex64 for float32, complex128 for float64. The real and imag functions together form the inverse, so for a complex value z, z == complex(real(z), imag(z)). If the operands of these functions are all constants, the return value is a constant. If any argument to any of complex, real, imag functions is NULL the result is NULL. For the numeric types, the following sizes are guaranteed Portions of this specification page are modifications based on work[2] created and shared by Google[3] and used according to terms described in the Creative Commons 3.0 Attribution License[4]. This specification is licensed under the Creative Commons Attribution 3.0 License, and code is licensed under a BSD license[5]. Links from the above documentation This section is not part of the specification. WARNING: The implementation of indices is new and it surely needs more time to become mature. Indices are used currently used only by the WHERE clause. The following expression patterns of 'WHERE expression' are recognized and trigger index use. The relOp is one of the relation operators <, <=, ==, >=, >. For the equality operator both operands must be of comparable types. For all other operators both operands must be of ordered types. The constant expression is a compile time constant expression. Some constant folding is still a TODO. Parameter is a QL parameter ($1 etc.). Consider tables t and u, both with an indexed field f. The WHERE expression doesn't comply with the above simple detected cases. However, such query is now automatically rewritten to which will use both of the indices. The impact of using the indices can be substantial (cf. BenchmarkCrossJoin*) if the resulting rows have low "selectivity", ie. only few rows from both tables are selected by the respective WHERE filtering. Note: Existing QL DBs can be used and indices can be added to them. However, once any indices are present in the DB, the old QL versions cannot work with such DB anymore. Running a benchmark with -v (-test.v) outputs information about the scale used to report records/s and a brief description of the benchmark. For example Running the full suite of benchmarks takes a lot of time. Use the -timeout flag to avoid them being killed after the default time limit (10 minutes).

v1.4.7 • 2 years ago